Мануал форд транзит 2015

Ford TRANSIT 2015 Owner's Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ford Manuals
  4. Automobile
  5. TRANSIT 2015
  6. Owner’s manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com

ford.ca

May 2014

Second Printing

Owner’s Manual

Transit

Litho in U.S.A.

FK3J 19A321 AB

loading

Related Manuals for Ford TRANSIT 2015

Summary of Contents for Ford TRANSIT 2015

  • Page 1
    2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual fordowner.com ford.ca May 2014 Second Printing Owner’s Manual Transit Litho in U.S.A. FK3J 19A321 AB…
  • Page 2
    No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2014 All rights reserved. Part Number: 03/2014 20140509210105…
  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    Symbols Glossary……….7 General Information on Radio Frequencies……….44 Data Recording……….9 Remote Control……….44 California Proposition 65……10 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Perchlorate…………10 Control…………46 Ford Credit…………10 Replacement Parts MyKey Recommendation……..10 Principle of Operation……..47 Special Notices……….11 Creating a MyKey……….47 Mobile Communications Clearing All MyKeys……..48 Equipment…………11…

  • Page 5
    Table of Contents Power Seats………….98 Lighting Rear Seats…………99 General Information……..66 Lighting Control……….66 Auxiliary Power Points Autolamps…………67 Auxiliary Power Points……..103 Instrument Lighting Dimmer…..68 Cigar Lighter………..104 Daytime Running Lamps……68 Direction Indicators……..69 Storage Compartments Interior Lamps……….69 Cup Holders…………105 Overhead Console……..105 Windows and Mirrors Bottle Holder……….105 Power Windows……….70 Exterior Mirrors……….71…
  • Page 6
    Table of Contents Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Reduced Engine Performance….173 Brakes…………137 Economical Driving……..173 Parking Brake……….138 Cold Weather Precautions……174 Driving Through Water……..174 Traction Control Floor Mats…………174 Principle of Operation………139 Using Traction Control……..139 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance……..176 Stability Control Hazard Warning Flashers……177 Principle of Operation……..141 Fuel Shutoff………….177 Using Stability Control……..142…
  • Page 7
    Table of Contents Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.5L……204 Wheels and Tires Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.7L……204 General Information……..233 Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.2L Power Stroke Tire Care…………234 Diesel…………204 Using Winter Tires……..250 Engine Oil Check……….204 Using Snow Chains……..251 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Tire Pressure Monitoring System….251 Filter………….205 Changing a Road Wheel……256…
  • Page 8
    Table of Contents Audio Troubleshooting……299 SYNC General Information……..300 Using Voice Recognition……302 Using SYNC With Your Phone….305 SYNC Applications and Services..320 Using SYNC With Your Media Player…………332 SYNC Troubleshooting……342 MyFord Touch General Information……..349 Settings…………357 Entertainment……….368 Phone……………387 Information…………395 Navigation………….404 Accessories Accessories………….414 Auxiliary Switches……..415 Appendices End User License Agreement….416 Extended Service Plan…
  • Page 9
    Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 10: Introduction

    Introduction Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an ABOUT THIS MANUAL authorized Ford dealer may have originally sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle Thank you for choosing Ford. We modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some recommend that you take some time to…

  • Page 11
    Introduction Air conditioning system Engine air filter E162384 Anti-lock braking system Engine coolant Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant temperature Battery Engine oil Battery acid Explosive gas Brake fluid — non petroleum Fan warning based Brake system Fasten safety belt Cabin air filter Front airbag Check fuel cap…
  • Page 12: Data Recording

    Introduction Jack Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control Keep out of reach of children E138639 E161353 Windshield wash and wipe Lighting control Low tire pressure warning DATA RECORDING Maintain correct fluid level A large number of electronic components of your vehicle contain data storage modules temporarily or permanently storing technical data about the condition Note operating instructions…

  • Page 13: California Proposition 65

    After an error has been (U.S. Only) corrected, these data are deleted from the error storage module or they are constantly Ford Credit offers a full range of financing overwritten. and lease plans to help you acquire your When using the vehicle, situations may vehicle.

  • Page 14: Special Notices

    Make sure you are aware of all applicable failure of non-Ford parts may not be local laws that may affect the use of covered by the Ford Warranty. For electronic devices while driving.

  • Page 15
    Introduction are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings.
  • Page 16: Child Safety

    Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS requirements of law. Ford recommends See the following sections for directions checking with a NHTSA Certified Child on how to properly use safety restraints Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and for children. consult your pediatrician to make sure your…

  • Page 17: Installing Child Seats

    Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety seat toddlers (generally age four or younger). (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat).

  • Page 18: Child Safety

    Child Safety Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the an infant carrier, convertible seat, or child seat will be installed in the upright toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or position. children weighing 40 pounds (18 •…

  • Page 19
    Child Safety E142530 E142875 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic portions together, route the tongue locking mode, grasp the shoulder through the child seat according to the portion of the belt and pull downward child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
  • Page 20
    Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is correctly installed. In Canada, check with your local St.
  • Page 21
    Child Safety E184881 E178553 Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. E178551 E177639 E178552 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 22: Using Tether Straps

    Child Safety The LATCH anchors are located at the rear Combining Safety Belt and LATCH section of the rear seat between the Lower Anchors for Attaching Child cushion and seat back above the symbols Safety Seats as shown. Follow the child seat When used in combination, either the manufacturer’s instructions to correctly safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors…

  • Page 23
    Child Safety E178553 E178551 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it.
  • Page 24
    If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends its use. Rear Seats Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat, under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts.
  • Page 25: Booster Seats

    Ford also the seat cushion? recommends its use. • Can the child sit without slouching? BOOSTER SEATS •…

  • Page 26
    Child Safety If your backless booster seat has a • High back booster seats removable shield, remove the shield. If a If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot vehicle seating position has a low seat find a seating position that adequately back or no head restraint, a backless supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat may place your child’s head…
  • Page 27: Child Seat Positioning

    Child Safety E142597 WARNINGS If the booster seat slides on the vehicle warnings provided by your vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a manufacturer. A safety seat that is rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet improperly installed or utilized, is liner under the booster seat may improve inappropriate for your child’s height, age, this condition.

  • Page 28: Child Safety Locks

    Child Safety Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Restraint Combined Use any attachment method as indicated below by X type weight of LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt child and (lower (lower and top and LATCH only child anchors…

  • Page 29: Right-Hand Side

    Child Safety Right-Hand Side Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock on and counterclockwise to switch it off. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 30: Safety Belts

    Safety Belts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly WARNINGS restrained in a rear seating position. Always drive and ride with the seat Failure to follow this could seriously backrest upright and the lap belt increase the risk of injury or death.

  • Page 31: Fastening The Safety Belts

    Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners at the front 2. To unfasten, press the release button seating positions are designed to tighten and remove the tongue from the the safety belts when activated. In frontal buckle. and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and Using Safety Belts During rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may Pregnancy…

  • Page 32: Safety Belts

    Safety Belts Safety Belt Locking Modes Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is WARNINGS automatically pre-locked. The safety belt After any vehicle crash, the safety will still retract to remove any slack in the belt system at all passenger seating shoulder belt.

  • Page 33: Safety Belt Height Adjustment

    Safety Belts How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and return the safety belt to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the…

  • Page 34: Safety Belt Minder

    Safety Belts Conditions of operation If… Then… The driver’s safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1- before the ignition switch is turned to the 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds on position… 4-8 seconds. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the The safety belt warning light and warning indicator light is illuminated and the…

  • Page 35: Child Restraint And Safety Belt Maintenance

    The driver safety belt is unbuckled. specific to the child restraint. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the Ford Motor Company recommends that engine. all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light involved in a crash be replaced.

  • Page 36: Supplementary Restraints System

    Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION — WARNINGS If the airbag has deployed, the airbag CANADA/UNITED STATES OF will not function again and must be AMERICA replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will WARNINGS increase the risk of injury in a crash. Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a The airbags are a supplemental restraint…

  • Page 37: Driver And Passenger Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. DRIVER AND PASSENGER Passenger Airbag On and Off AIRBAGS Switch (If Equipped) WARNINGS WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Never place your arm or any objects Systems, children 12 and under over an airbag module.

  • Page 38: Supplementary Restraints System

    Supplementary Restraints System Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional. Switch position Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag indicator OFF: Lit Disabled…

  • Page 39
    Supplementary Restraints System 2. When the ignition is turned on, the pass airbag off light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts off and then turns back on. This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated. Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On WARNINGS The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically…
  • Page 40
    Supplementary Restraints System you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Deactivation Criteria (Excluding Canada)
  • Page 41
    Supplementary Restraints System • the vehicle has no rear seat; Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only) • the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant WARNING seat; or This vehicle has special energy • the infant has a medical condition management safety belts for the which, according to the infant’s driver and right front passenger.
  • Page 42: Children And Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System • my vehicle has no rear seat; After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very • although children age 12 and under ride important that they continue to sit in the rear seat whenever possible, properly.

  • Page 43: Side Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System If two adults and a child occupy a Regular The side airbags are located on the Cab, properly restrain the child in the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front center front unless doing so would interfere seats.

  • Page 44: Safety Canopy

    Supplementary Restraints System The Safety Canopy will deploy during SAFETY CANOPY (If Equipped) significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected WARNINGS by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy Do not place objects or mount is mounted to the roof side rail behind the equipment on or near the headliner headliner and above each row of seats.

  • Page 45: Crash Sensors And Airbag Indicator

    Supplementary Restraints System Children 12 years old and under should The supplemental restraint system control always be properly restrained in the rear module also monitors the readiness of the seats. The safety canopy will not interfere above safety devices plus the crash with children restrained using a properly sensors.

  • Page 46: Airbag Disposal

    Supplementary Restraints System • The design of the front airbags is to deploy only in frontal and near-frontal crashes, for example not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, unless the crash causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. • The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to deploy only in frontal and near-frontal crashes, and may also deploy if a safety canopy…

  • Page 47: Keys And Remote Controls

    Keys and Remote Controls • structures around the vehicle PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • other vehicles parked next to your The remote control allows you to: vehicle • remotely lock or unlock the vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote doors control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions, for example…

  • Page 48: Programming A New Remote Control

    Keys and Remote Controls Integrated Key head Transmitter E138615 E138619 Note: Your vehicle s keys came with a security label that provides important Twist a thin coin in the slot of the vehicle key cut information. Keep the label transmitter near the key ring to remove in a safe place for future reference.

  • Page 49: Replacing A Lost Key Or Remote Control

    Keys and Remote Controls Note: If locking was not successful or if any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will not flash.

  • Page 50: Mykey

    MyKey Configurable Settings PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION With an admin key, you can configure MyKey allows you to program keys with certain MyKey settings when you first restricted driving modes to promote good create a MyKey and before you recycle the driving habits.

  • Page 51: Clearing All Mykeys

    MyKey Press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description Settings Press the OK button. MyKey Press the OK button. Create MyKey When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey.

  • Page 52
    MyKey To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description Settings Press the OK button. MyKey Press the OK button. Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.
  • Page 53: Checking Mykey System Status

    MyKey You can find information on programmed CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM MyKey(s) using the information display STATUS control on the steering wheel. See Information Displays (page 79). To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Description Settings…

  • Page 54: Using Mykey With Remote Start Systems

    Ford-approved remote start gear. This is intentional. When you restart system. your vehicle, it reads the Key or intelligent…

  • Page 55: Mykey Troubleshooting

    2. Start your vehicle using your program the remote start system as a non-Ford-approved remote start fob. MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote 3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48). start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver Follow Steps 1-3.

  • Page 56
    MyKey Condition Potential Causes · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
  • Page 57: Locks

    Locks Note: The liftgate does not automatically LOCKING AND UNLOCKING open. Note: Make sure you have locked your Note: The liftgate unlocks if all the doors vehicle before leaving it unattended. are unlocked. Note: Do not leave the keys in your vehicle. Reprogramming the Unlocking Function Locking…

  • Page 58: Opening And Closing The Sliding Door

    Locks Opening and Closing the Sliding Door Opening the Sliding Door E172313 Pull the door handle to release the door check feature. 2. Slide the door to close. Opening and Closing the Double E148804 Rear Doors Pull the interior door handle to open the door.

  • Page 59
    Locks Unlocking and Opening the Double Rear Doors From Inside E148806 E175828 Lift the locking button up. E178366 E175955 Slide the lever to release the catch. 2. Push the inner release lever down to 2. Fully open the cargo door. open the door.
  • Page 60: Rear Emergency Exit

    Locks E179501 E148806 Pull the interior handle up to open the door Rear Emergency Exit in an emergency. Wagon and Bus Automatic Locking You can set your vehicle’s doors to lock automatically when you exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). You can switch this on in the information display.

  • Page 61: One-Stage Unlocking

    Locks One-Stage Unlocking The locks on van, bus or wagon and Kombi have two zones, cabin and cargo. For van You can switch on this function using the and Kombi, the cargo area includes the information display. See Information rear doors and the sliding door. For bus or Displays (page 79).

  • Page 62: Security

    Switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key disarms the engine Note: The system is not compatible with immobilization system. non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Replacement Keys Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security The integrated keyhead transmitter protection.

  • Page 63: Anti-Theft Alarm

    Security 2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped) the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Alarm System 3. Switch the ignition off and remove the The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against first correctly coded key from the unauthorized access to your vehicle ignition.

  • Page 64: Steering Wheel

    Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 95). E95179 3. Lock the steering column. AUDIO CONTROL — VEHICLES WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY…

  • Page 65: Audio Control — Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display

    Steering Wheel Seek, Next or Previous VOICE CONTROL — VEHICLES WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN Press the seek button to: DISPLAY • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: •…

  • Page 66: Cruise Control

    Steering Wheel MyFord Touch® Controls INFORMATION DISPLAY (If Equipped) CONTROL Your steering wheel controls may also have these additional features. Press to go to the home screen. E142613 Press to go to the information screen. E142608 See MyFord Touch (page 349). CRUISE CONTROL E130248 See Information Displays (page 79).

  • Page 67: Wipers And Washers

    Wipers and Washers Intermittent Wipe WINDSHIELD WIPERS Defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Do not operate the windshield wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to overheat. Always use the windshield washers before you switch the windshield wipers on.

  • Page 68: Windshield Washers

    Wipers and Washers Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades.

  • Page 69: Lighting

    Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Lighting Control Positions Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold.

  • Page 70: Autolamps

    Lighting Headlamp Flasher E163719 Pull the lever slightly toward the steering E142451 wheel. When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations Parking Lamps or when the wipers activate. Select position B on the lighting control to The headlamps will remain on for a period switch the parking lamps on.

  • Page 71: Instrument Lighting Dimmer

    Lighting Switching the Rain Lights On and Off control on the steering wheel. See General Information (page 79). See You can switch the rain light feature on Information Messages (page 84). and off using the information display To switch the rain lights feature on and off, scroll to: Message Action and Description Settings…

  • Page 72: Direction Indicators

    Lighting If you set the switch to position B, the DIRECTION INDICATORS courtesy lamps will automatically turn on when you unlock your vehicle or open a door. If you leave a door open with the ignition switched off, they will automatically turn off after a short period of time to prevent the vehicle battery from losing charge.

  • Page 73: Windows And Mirrors

    Windows and Mirrors Driver Side One-Touch Up POWER WINDOWS Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or WARNINGS lift it again to stop the window. To avoid risk of injury, do not leave Bounce-Back children or pets unattended in your vehicle.

  • Page 74: Exterior Mirrors

    Windows and Mirrors 4. Release the switch. 5. Lift the switch again for one more second. 6. Open the window and then try to close using the one-touch feature. Repeat the procedure if the window does not close using the one-touch feature.

  • Page 75: Rear Quarter Windows

    Windows and Mirrors The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. REAR QUARTER WINDOWS Opening the Rear Windows Equipped)

  • Page 76: Instrument Cluster

    Instrument Cluster GAUGES E184961 Information display. See Information Displays (page 79). Speedometer. Engine coolant temperature gauge. Tripmeter reset and distance to empty toggle button. Fuel gauge. Tachometer. Vehicle Settings and Personalization Information Display See General Information (page 79). Odometer Engine Coolant Temperature Registers the distance your vehicle has Gauge traveled.

  • Page 77: Tripmeter Reset And Distance To

    Instrument Cluster If the needle enters the red section, the The needle should move toward F when engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points soon as it is safe to do so and switch the to E after adding fuel, this indicates your engine off.

  • Page 78: Warning Lamps And Indicators

    Instrument Cluster If it illuminates when your vehicle is WARNING LAMPS AND moving, make sure the parking brake is INDICATORS disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid The following warning lamps and level or a brake system fault. Have the indicators will alert you to a vehicle system checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 79: Direction Indicator

    Instrument Cluster All Vehicles Water In Fuel If either lamp illuminates when the engine It will illuminate if there is excess is running, this indicates a malfunction. The water in the fuel filter. Drain off engine will continue to run but it may have the water immediately.

  • Page 80: Audible Warnings And Indicators

    Instrument Cluster Low Fuel Level Safety Belt Minder If it illuminates when you are It will illuminate and a chime will driving, refuel as soon as sound to remind you to fasten possible. your safety belt. See Safety Belt Minder (page 31). Low Tire Pressure Warning Stability Control It will illuminate if the tire…

  • Page 81: Exterior Lamps On

    Instrument Cluster Exterior Lamps On Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver door, and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps Gearshift Lever not in Park (P) Sounds when the driver door is open, the key is in the ignition and the gearshift lever is not in park (P).

  • Page 82: Information Displays

    Information Displays Information Display Controls GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road.

  • Page 83
    Information Displays Message Average Fuel All values See Trip Computer (page 82). See Gauges (page 73). Information Message Driver Alert DEF level Engine Hours Idle: Engine Hours Running: Trailer Brake Gain: System check Settings Message Action Driver Assist Driver Alert Trailer Brake Electric Elec.-Hydraulic…
  • Page 84
    Information Displays Message Action Measure unit Choose your applicable setting Distance Choose your applicable setting Temp unit Choose your applicable setting Chimes Information Warning Convenience Locks Autolock Autounlock Global Unlock Custom locking System Reset Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default Menu Structure — Information and System Check Entertainment Display…
  • Page 85: Trip Computer

    Information Displays Message Missed calls Speed Dial Text messaging BT Devices Phone settings Set as master Phonebook pref. Set ringtone Phone status Text msg notify Emerg. Assist. SYNC-Menu Message SYNC-Settings Bluetooth on Set defaults Master reset System info Voice settings Browse USB SYNC-Apps All Values…

  • Page 86: Personalized Settings

    Information Displays Distance to Empty Trip Timer Indicates the approximate distance your Registers the elapsed time of individual vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in journeys or the total time since the function the tank. Changes in driving pattern may was last reset.

  • Page 87: Information Messages

    Information Displays To switch chimes off or on, scroll to: Message Action Warning Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button. Information Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button. Note: The default setting is on. Note: You cannot switch safety warning message chimes off. You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus.

  • Page 88
    Information Displays Battery and Charging System Message Description and Action Electrical system over- Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the voltage Stop safely ignition off. The system has detected a fault that requires service.
  • Page 89
    Information Displays Message Description and Action DEF fault Engine idled Indicates that the engine is restricted to idle operation. The See manual system has detected a fault that requires service. DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates that your vehicle speed will be restricted when you max Upon restart restart your vehicle.
  • Page 90
    Information Displays Lighting Message Description and Action Brake lamp Bulb fault Indicates that a brake lamp bulb has burned out. See Main- tenance (page 200). Low beam Bulb fault Indicates that a low beam headlamp bulb has burned out. See Maintenance (page 200). Headlamp fault Service The system has detected a fault that requires service.
  • Page 91
    Information Displays Starting System Message Description and Action Press brake to start Press the brake pedal before you start the engine. Cranking time exceeded Indicates that the engine has failed to start. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Description and Action Low Tire Pressure The tire pressure is low in one or more tires, check the tire pressures.
  • Page 92: Climate Control

    Climate Control Air Conditioning PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The system directs air through the Outside Air evaporator for cooling. The evaporator extracts humidity from the air to help keep Keep the air intakes in front of the the windows free of mist. The system windshield free from obstruction (such as directs the resulting condensation to the snow or leaves) to allow the climate…

  • Page 93: Manual Climate Control

    Climate Control Side Air Vent E169288 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL E147011 Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.

  • Page 94: Hints On Controlling The Interior Climate

    Climate Control Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows open for two to three minutes. Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution. Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the Select to distribute air through windshield free from obstruction (such as…

  • Page 95: Recommended Settings For Cooling

    Climate Control Recommended Settings for Side Window Defogging in Cold Cooling Weather • Adjust the fan speed to the second • Adjust the air distribution control to the speed setting. instrument panel and windshield air vents positions. • Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings.

  • Page 96: Rear Passenger Climate Controls

    Climate Control REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS E175829 Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. Temperature and air distribution control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature and distribution.

  • Page 97
    Climate Control The heated exterior mirrors will clear the mirror glass of thin ice and fog. They will turn off automatically after a short period of time. Note: Do not use razor blades or sharp objects to remove ice from the mirror glass or attempt to adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place.
  • Page 98: Seats

    Seats • Adjust the head restraint so that the SITTING IN THE CORRECT top of it is level with the top of your POSITION head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain WARNINGS comfortable. Do not recline the seat backrest too •…

  • Page 99: Removing The Head Restraint

    Seats The head restraint consists of: Raising the Head Restraint Lift the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint WARNING Do not remove the head restraint E138642 from an occupied seat.

  • Page 100: Manual Seats

    Seats Note: The driver seat has removable stop MANUAL SEATS bolts on the track to enable access to the vehicle battery. See Changing the 12V Moving the Seat Backward or Battery (page 213). Forward Adjusting the Lumbar Support WARNINGS Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position.

  • Page 101: Power Seats

    Seats Adjusting the Armrest E95256 Raise the armrest fully. 2. Lower the armrest to the stowed position. E175474 3. Raise the armrest to attain the desired Lift the handle. position. 2. Move the seat back backward or forward to attain the desired position. POWER SEATS 3.

  • Page 102: Rear Seats

    Seats E138647 Power Lumbar REAR SEATS WARNINGS Do not use the bench seats as a bed when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Do not place objects on a folded seat.

  • Page 103
    Seats Recline Adjustment Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger Vehicles WARNINGS WARNINGS When reclining the seat backrest forward and backward, take care not Seats can weigh up to 132 lb (60 kg). to get your hands caught between Do not attempt to lift or carry a seat the seat backrest and the frame, catches on your own.
  • Page 104: Installing The Seats

    Seats 3. Pull the seat backward to release the seat frame front catches. 4. Remove the seat. Note: Two persons must carry out this procedure. Note: You can only remove seats that have integral release handles. Note: The seat back does not fold forward. Installing the Seats WARNINGS Make sure that the floor catches are…

  • Page 105
    Seats Align the seat frame front catches. 2. Push the seat forward to engage the seat frame front catches. 3. Align the seat frame rear catches. 4. Allow the seat to drop under its own weight for the last 6-8 in (15-20 cm). Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 106: Auxiliary Power Points

    Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Point Locations WARNINGS Do not use the power points for operating a cigar lighter element. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power points. Run the engine for full capacity use of the power points.

  • Page 107: Cigar Lighter

    Auxiliary Power Points • Compressor-driven refrigerators. • Medical or measuring equipment that must process precise data. • Appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply, for example: • Microcomputer-controlled electric blankets. • Touch-sensor lamps. CIGAR LIGHTER E143941 Use the AC power point for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts.

  • Page 108: Storage Compartments

    Storage Compartments CUP HOLDERS WARNINGS Do not place hot drinks in the cup holders when your vehicle is moving. Make sure that cups placed in the holders do not obstruct your vision while driving. OVERHEAD CONSOLE Overhead Storage Compartments Overhead Console E171160 WARNING Do not place heavy objects in the…

  • Page 109: Starting And Stopping The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground E72128 cover.

  • Page 110: Starting A Diesel Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine Flooded Engine When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm up the Move the transmission selector lever engine. If the engine idle speed does not to position P. slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 111: Diesel Particulate Filter

    Starting and Stopping the Engine and the environmental temperature sensor 4. Release the key. will determine how long the glow plugs Note: You may need to crank the engine for stay energized. The required time for the up to 10 seconds when the outside air glow plugs to remain energized will temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below.

  • Page 112: Switching Off The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine Regeneration You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the WARNING regeneration process: • Drive your vehicle in more favorable Do not park or idle your vehicle over conditions, which you will find at higher dry leaves, dry grass or other vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a combustible materials.

  • Page 113: Starting And Stopping The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine • Check for heat anywhere in the WARNINGS electrical hookup once the system has Do not use your heater with been operating for approximately 30 ungrounded electrical systems or minutes. two-pronged adapters. There is a risk •…

  • Page 114: Fuel And Refueling

    Fuel and Refueling • Automotive fuels can be harmful or SAFETY PRECAUTIONS fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if WARNINGS swallowed can cause death or Do not overfill the fuel tank. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately, even if no cause leakage and lead to fuel spray…

  • Page 115: Fuel Quality — Gasoline

    Fuel and Refueling • Fuels containing metallic based FUEL QUALITY — GASOLINE additives, including manganese-based compounds. Note: Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause powertrain • Fuels containing the octane booster damage, impair the emission control system additive, methylcyclopentadienyl or cause loss of vehicle performance.

  • Page 116: Fuel Quality — Diesel

    Do not mix diesel with oil, kerosene, Ford Motor Company dealer service parts. paraffin, gasoline or other liquids to Failure to use retrofit components other diesel. This can cause damage to the than those available through your fuel system.

  • Page 117: Fuel And Refueling

    To help achieve acceptable engine markets will need to be retrofitted (at the performance and durability when using customer’s expense using Ford authorized biodiesel in your vehicle: dealer service parts) in order to be reliably •…

  • Page 118: Running Out Of Fuel

    This Ford specifications in your fuel. may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the RUNNING OUT OF FUEL ground.

  • Page 119: Catalytic Converter

    Fuel and Refueling 6. Replace the fuel filler cap and close WARNINGS the fuel filler door. Do not dispose of fuel in the Clean the plastic funnel and place it household refuse or the public back in your vehicle or correctly dispose sewage system.

  • Page 120: Selective Catalytic Reduction System

    Fuel and Refueling Continued driving without refilling the fluid SELECTIVE CATALYTIC will result in: REDUCTION SYSTEM • Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to this occurring a message will appear in WARNINGS the information display. You must refill the diesel exhaust •…

  • Page 121
    Fuel and Refueling Note: Immediately wash off any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled on to a painted surface with soapy water. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Fuel Station Pump Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using a pump is similar to a refuelling your vehicle.
  • Page 122: Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines

    Fuel and Refueling 6. Remove the spout from the diesel Note: If the vehicle speed becomes limited exhaust fluid container and replace the or the engine will only run at idle speed, cap. normal vehicle operation will not resume until you have the system repaired. To Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in service a contaminated or inoperative the container retain it for later use.

  • Page 123: Refueling

    Fuel and Refueling Driving conditions Approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage per tank mi (km) Primary trailer tow, aggressive driving 1100–4100 (1,770–6,600) City drive 4100–6500 (6,600–10,460) Steady highway drive 6500–10500 (10,460–16,900) Do not attempt to start the engine if you have refueled the fuel tank with the REFUELING incorrect fuel.

  • Page 124
    Fuel and Refueling 3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B during refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. E139202 Note: When you insert the correct size fuel pump nozzle into a capless fuel system, a…
  • Page 125: Fuel Consumption

    Fuel and Refueling Calculating Fuel Economy FUEL CONSUMPTION Do not measure fuel economy during the We derive CO2 and fuel consumption first 1000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is figures in laboratory tests according to the engine break-in period). A more Regulation (EC) 715/2007 or CR (EC) accurate measurement is obtained after 692/2008 and subsequent amendments.

  • Page 126
    When the service engine soon your vehicle and to its emissions system. indicator illuminates, the OBD-II If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft system has detected a or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may…
  • Page 127: Transmission

    Fuel and Refueling You can correct these temporary If the vehicle engine or transmission has malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with just been serviced or the battery has good quality fuel, correctly closing the fuel recently run out of charge or been filler door or letting the electrical system replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate dry out.

  • Page 128
    10 and 20 minutes. You replacement that the Ford Warranty may can usually reduce the duration of not cover. If your vehicle is not fitted with regeneration if you maintain a constant operator commanded regeneration, check speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).
  • Page 129
    Drive in a manner to clean the diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system mainten- ance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these messages.
  • Page 130
    You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to Drive to clean continue to function correctly. Do not disregard a system maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding this message.
  • Page 131
    Fuel and Refueling To start operator commanded regeneration, run the engine at normal operating temperature and scroll to: Message Action and Description Settings Press the OK button. Exhaust Filter Press the OK button. Full OK = Cleaning Select one of the following: Exhaust Filter Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded…
  • Page 132
    Fuel and Refueling the vehicle over materials that could burn last up to 30 minutes. until the exhaust system has had sufficient When the system is at the point time to cool. Depending on the amount of of over saturation, the service soot collected by the diesel particulate engine soon light will illuminate filter, ambient temperature, and altitude,…
  • Page 133
    Fuel and Refueling How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator Service engine soon indicator. Commanded Regeneration If you need to cancel the operator commanded regeneration, press the brake Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly pedal or switch the ignition off to stop the Maintenance procedure.
  • Page 134
    In the U.S. federal law and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system(s). Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. Ford recommends against any vehicle modification without determining applicable law. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 135
    Fuel and Refueling If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following: • A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose. • A plugged engine air filter element.
  • Page 136: Transmission

    Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Manual upshift Manual downshift WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully Tow/Haul (T/H) (If Equipped) and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition Tow/Haul delays transmission upshift to off and remove the key whenever you leave reduce the frequency of transmission your vehicle.

  • Page 137
    Transmission The transmission shifts to the appropriate WARNINGS gear for optimum performance based on Apply the parking brake, shift the ambient temperature, road gradient, gearshift lever to park (P) and switch vehicle load and your input. the ignition off before leaving your vehicle.
  • Page 138: Brake-Shift Interlock

    Transmission If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Upshifts when accelerating (recom- Snow mended for best fuel economy) If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, shift Upshift from: Vehicle speed mph between drive (D) and reverse (R) pressing ( km/h): lightly on the accelerator pedal in each gear.

  • Page 139
    Transmission E182198 2. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the E174827 housing cover. 4. Move the white lever toward the rear of your vehicle. 5. Shift the gearshift lever out of park (P) and into neutral (N). 6.
  • Page 140: Brakes

    Brakes Anti-lock Brake System GENERAL INFORMATION This system helps you maintain steering Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If control during emergency stops by keeping a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or the brakes from locking. continuous squeal sound is present, the This lamp momentarily brake linings may be worn-out.

  • Page 141: Parking Brake

    Brakes Note: Do not press the release button while PARKING BRAKE pulling the parking brake lever up. Center Parking Brake E172225 To apply the parking brake: Press the foot brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its fullest extent.

  • Page 142: Traction Control

    Traction Control Note: A MyKey can be set up to prevent the PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION MyKey user from switching the traction control system off. See MyKey (page The traction control system helps avoid 47). drive wheel spin and loss of traction. If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power…

  • Page 143: Traction Control

    Traction Control WARNING If a malfunction occurs within the AdvanceTrac system, the traction control off lamp will illuminate. Make sure the traction control system was not manually switched off using the traction control button. If the traction control lamp stays on, have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately.

  • Page 144: Stability Control

    Stability Control The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. WARNINGS The electronic stability control portion of Vehicle modifications involving the system helps avoid skids and lateral braking system, aftermarket roof slides and roll stability control helps avoid racks, suspension, steering system,…

  • Page 145: Using Stability Control

    Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control (RSC®) The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off, but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R.

  • Page 146: Parking Aids

    As you continue the inner your responsibility to drive with due sensors will detect objects directly behind care and attention. your vehicle. If your vehicles has a non-Ford approved trailer tow module the PARKING AID system may not correctly detect objects.

  • Page 147: Rear View Camera

    Parking Aids The system detects objects when you shift into reverse (R) and: • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is stationary but an object is approaching your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

  • Page 148: Using The Display

    Parking Aids Using the Display WARNINGS The operation of the camera may WARNING vary depending on the ambient temperature, vehicle and road Objects above the camera may not conditions. be visible. Check the area behind your vehicle when necessary. Do not place objects in front of the camera.

  • Page 149: Switching The Rear View Camera Off

    Parking Aids Green — 24 inches to 35 inches (0.6 meter to 0.9 meter). Black — center line of the projected vehicle path. Note: The green line is extended from 35 in (0.9 m) up to a distance of 126 in (3.2 m). Note: When reversing with a trailer the camera will show the direction of your vehicle and not the direction of the trailer.

  • Page 150: Cruise Control

    Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Cruise control allows you to control your speed using the switches on the steering wheel. You can use cruise control when you exceed approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

  • Page 151: Switching Cruise Control Off

    Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pull RES toward you and release. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off. Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 152: Driving Aids

    Driving Aids SPEED LIMITER WARNINGS The system may not operate in areas Engine Speed Limiter during roadwork construction. Engine speed is limited to protect the The system may not operate on engine. roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes. Vehicle Speed Limiter — Fixed Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding The system prevents you from driving…

  • Page 153: Lane Keeping System

    Driving Aids System Warnings Alertness level is critical, indicating that you should take a rest as soon as it is safe Note: The system will not issue warnings to do so. below approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). The status bar will travel from left to right The warning system has two stages: as the calculated alertness level A temporary warning is issued to advise…

  • Page 154: Driving Aids

    Driving Aids The system will automatically detect and WARNINGS track the lane markings on the road. If your The sensor may incorrectly track lane vehicle unintentionally drifts toward the markings such as other structures or road lane markings, you will see a warning objects.

  • Page 155
    Driving Aids Setting the System Sensitivity • If you apply direct steering, accelerate fast or brake hard. You can adjust how quickly the system • Your vehicle speed is outside the warns you of a dangerous situation. The operating limits. system has two sensitivity levels which you can set using the information display.
  • Page 156: Load Carrying

    Load Carrying vehicle will provide maximum LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES return of vehicle design Securing Cargo performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label: Base Curb Weight — is the weight…

  • Page 157: Load Carrying

    Load Carrying Payload — is the combined weight authorized-dealer installed of cargo and passengers that the equipment on the vehicle, you vehicle is carrying. The maximum must subtract the weight of the payload for your vehicle can be equipment from the payload listed found on the Tire Label on the on the Tire Label in order to B-Pillar or the edge of the driver…

  • Page 158: Towing

    Load Carrying E142517 CARGO E143817 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Cargo Weight — includes all Rating) — is the maximum weight added to the Base Curb allowable weight that can be Weight, including cargo and carried by a single axle (front or optional equipment.

  • Page 159: Towing

    Load Carrying Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. E143818 Safety Compliance Certification GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) — Label. The label shall be affixed is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus to either the door hinge pillar, cargo, plus passengers.

  • Page 160: Towing

    Load Carrying E142524 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. E143819 GCWR (Gross Combined GCW (Gross Combined Weight) Weight Rating) — is the maximum — is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus…

  • Page 161: Towing

    Load Carrying for operation at Gross Vehicle Examples: For a 5000 pound Weight Rating, not at Gross (2268 kilogram) conventional Combined Weight Rating.) trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and Separate functional brakes should 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue be used for safe control of towed load range of 500 to 750 pounds vehicles and for trailers where the (227 to 340 kilograms).

  • Page 162: Towing

    Load Carrying 2. Determine the combined *Suppose your vehicle has a weight of the driver and 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo passengers that will be riding and luggage capacity. You decide in your vehicle. to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your 3.

  • Page 163
    Load Carrying be: 635 kilograms — (2 x 99 kilograms) — (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 — 198 — 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 — (2 x…
  • Page 164: Towing

    Towing Load Placement TOWING A TRAILER To help minimize how trailer WARNINGS movement affects your vehicle Do not exceed the Gross when driving: Vehicle Weight Rating or the • Load the heaviest items closest Gross Axle Weight Rating to the trailer floor. specified on the certification label.

  • Page 165: Trailer Sway Control

    Towing TRAILER SWAY CONTROL RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Equipped) Note: Make sure to take into WARNING consideration trailer frontal area. Switching off trailer sway control Vehicles equipped with the Trailer increases the risk of loss of vehicle Tow Package or the Heavy Duty control, serious injury or death.

  • Page 166
    Towing Van and Chassis Cab Powertrain Axle Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded Ratio Trailer Weight 3.2L Power 3.31 10600 lb (4808 kg) 4750 lb (2155 kg) Stroke Diesel 3.2L Power 3.73 13500 lb (6123 kg) 7500 lb (3402 kg) Stroke Diesel 3.5L V6 GTDI 3.31 11200 lb (5080 kg)
  • Page 167: Essential Towing Checks

    Towing Calculating the Maximum ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle 1. Start with the gross combined has covered at least 1000 mi weight rating for your vehicle (1,600 km).

  • Page 168: Tow Hitch

    10% and 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. WARNING Weight Distributing Hitches The Ford trailer brake controller has been verified to be compatible with A weight distribution hitch is not trailers having electric-actuated recommended for use with your vehicle.

  • Page 169
    Towing Press the + and — buttons to adjust the brake controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase the gain setting to 10 (maximum trailer braking) or decrease it to zero (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises or lowers the setting continuously.
  • Page 170
    Towing The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph and the trailer connectivity status in the information display as follows: Message Action and Description Trailer Brake Displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain setting. This also displays if you Gain: use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with no trailer connected.
  • Page 171
    Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, the Ford Warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
  • Page 172: Before Towing A Trailer

    The trailer brake controller is only a gearshift in position park (P) to aid factory-installed or dealer-installed engine and transmission cooling and item. Ford is not responsible for to help A/C performance. warranty or performance of the controller due to misuse or customer •…

  • Page 173: Transporting The Vehicle

    Towing • If your vehicle is fitted with Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer AdvanceTrac with roll stability control after the trailer is removed from the water. (RSC), this system may turn on during Exceeding these limits may allow water to typical cornering maneuvers with a enter vehicle components: heavily loaded trailer.

  • Page 174: Towing The Vehicle On Four Wheels

    Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford flat-towed with all wheels on the ground Motor Company has not approved a under the following conditions: slingbelt towing procedure.

  • Page 175
    Towing Your vehicle cannot be flat-towed with all wheels on the ground beyond the limits set out above as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. See Emergency Towing. You must place your vehicle on a car-hauling trailer, or place the front wheels of your vehicle on a tow dolly.
  • Page 176: Driving Hints

    Driving Hints 5. Have your vehicle checked by an BREAKING-IN authorized dealer as soon as possible. You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 ECONOMICAL DRIVING kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving Fuel economy is affected by several things characteristics.

  • Page 177: Cold Weather Precautions

    Driving Hints • Reduce the use of air conditioning and When driving in water, maintain a low heat. speed and do not stop your vehicle. After driving through water and as soon as it is • Avoid using speed control in hilly safe to do so: terrain.

  • Page 178: Driving Hints

    Driving Hints WARNINGS Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.

  • Page 179: Roadside Emergencies

    Roadside Assistance Card included in glove compartment. your Owner’s Manual portfolio. United States Ford vehicle customers who Roadside Assistance covers: require Roadside Assistance, call • A flat tire change with a good spare, if 1-800-241-3673.

  • Page 180: Hazard Warning Flashers

    For before you authorize or pay for the service. vehicles equipped with a key system: Switch off the ignition. Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at 1-800-665-2006 for additional 2. Switch on the ignition. information.

  • Page 181: Jump Starting The Vehicle

    Roadside Emergencies Note: In the event that your vehicle does The positive (+) access terminal is next to not restart after your third attempt, contact the fuse box, under a red cap. To access an authorized dealer. the positive (+) terminal, lift the red cap JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS The gases around the battery can…

  • Page 182: Connecting The Jumper Cables

    Roadside Emergencies Connecting the Jumper Cables 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting WARNING battery. 4. Make the final connection of the Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, negative (-) cable to the grounding engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components connection point of the vehicle with…

  • Page 183: Post-Crash Alert System

    Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. The horn and lamps will turn off when: •…

  • Page 184: Customer Assistance

    A reasonable time must be allowed to Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 perform a repair after taking your vehicle Telephone to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) remanufactured or other parts that are Online authorized by Ford.

  • Page 185: In California (U.s. Only)

    2. Four or more repair attempts are made Ford in writing before pursuing remedies on the same nonconformity (a defect under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is or condition that substantially impairs also allowed a final repair attempt in some the use, value or safety of the vehicle) states.

  • Page 186: The Better Business Bureau (Bbb) Auto Line Program (U.s. Only)

    BBB. Canadian dealers. In those cases where You are not bound by the decision, and you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford may reject the decision and proceed to of Canada and the authorized dealer to…

  • Page 187: Getting Assistance Outside The U.s. And Canada

    CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, FORD MOTOR COMPANY and final as the arbitrator’s award is Customer Relationship Center binding on both you and Ford of Canada. 1555 Fairlane Drive CAMVAP services are available in all Fairlane Business Park #3 Canadian territories and provinces.

  • Page 188: Ordering Additional Owner’s Literature

    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export (U.S. ONLY) Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com. If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer.

  • Page 189: Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)

    Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA, you may call You can also obtain other the Vehicle Safety Hotline information about motor vehicle toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: safety from 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov. http://www.safercar.gov; or write REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator (CANADA ONLY) 1200 New Jersey Avenue, If you believe that your vehicle has Southeast…

  • Page 190: Fuses

    Fuses This is located behind the removable trim FUSE BOX LOCATIONS panel. Engine Compartment Fuse Box Pre-fuse Box This is located under the driver’s seat. Body Control Module Fuse Box E146726 For item location: See Under Hood Overview (page 201). E152512 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box This is located behind the removable trim…

  • Page 191: Fuse Specification Chart

    Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Engine Compartment Fuse Box E148826 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 192
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Diesel particulate filter vaporizer. Glow plug monitor. Anti-lock brake system. Stability assist. Ignition. 7.5A Powertrain control module. Cooling fan — Gasoline. Left-hand windshield wiper. Right-hand windshield wiper. Air conditioning clutch. Diesel particulate filter vaporizer glow plug. Not used.
  • Page 193
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE. Not used. 7.5A Crankcase sensor — Diesel. Injection power — Gasoline 3.7L. Ignition feed — Audio — Gasoline. 7.5A Crank case ventilation heater – Diesel. Single cooling fan. Twin cooling fan. Twin cooling fan 2 — Gasoline.
  • Page 194
    Fuses Relay Circuits switched Ignition 3. Not used. Not used. Not used. Cooling fan — Gasoline. Windshield wiper — on and off. Windshield wiper — low and high speed. Electrical Vacuum Pump — Gasoline. Starter motor. Air conditioning clutch. Fuel vaporizer system glow plug. Fuel injection pump.
  • Page 195: Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

    Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel E148827 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Airbag module. Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability control. Parking brake. Not used. Trailer tow back-up lamp relay. Cutaway body connectors. Not used. Not used. AC power outlet socket. Trailer brake module.

  • Page 196
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability control valves. Powertrain control module B+ relay. Powertrain control module power relay. Body control module power feed. Ignition relay 3. Modified vehicle connections. Not used. Heated exterior mirror relay. Modified vehicle ignition connections.
  • Page 197
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Blower motor. Horn relay. Windshield wiper relay. Remote keyless entry. Battery. 7.5A Power windows. Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning. Front blower motor. Rear blower motor. Heated rear window. Trailer socket. Auxiliary power points. Trailer connectors B+ supply.
  • Page 198
    Fuses Relay Circuits switched Horn. Trailer tow back-up lamp. Front blower motor. Rear blower motor. Heated rear window. Heated exterior mirrors. Not used. Modified vehicle connections. Pre-fuse Box E148828 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Engine compartment fuse box. 470A Starter motor. Alternator.
  • Page 199
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected 100A Passenger compartment fuse panel. Positive temperature coefficient heater. Not used. 100A Engine junction box feed. 100A Passenger compartment fuse panel. Passenger compartment fuse panel supply. Passenger compartment fuse panel supply. Auxiliary power point 1. Auxiliary power point 2.
  • Page 200: Body Control Module

    Fuses Body Control Module E148830 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Central locking system 2. Central locking system 1. Ignition switch. Parking assist control module. Brake transmission shift interlock. Rain sensor module. Windshield washer pump. Not used. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 201: Changing A Fuse

    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Not used. Right-hand high beam. Left-hand high beam. Right-hand exterior lamps. Left-hand position lamps. Not used. On-board diagnostic. Battery saver. Turn signal indicator. Power windows delayed accessory. Lane departure sensor heated windshield pad. Left-hand exterior lamps. Right-hand position lamps.

  • Page 202
    Fuses E142430 If electrical components in your vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. A break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 203: Maintenance

    Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help (Park). maintain its roadworthiness and resale 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key value. There is a large network of Ford (if equipped). authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing 3.

  • Page 204: Under Hood Overview — 3.5L

    Maintenance E135852 E87786 3. Move the catch to the left to release 4. Open the hood and support it with the the hood. hood strut. Closing the Hood Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly in the clip. 2.

  • Page 205: Under Hood Overview — 3.7L

    Maintenance Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 223). Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204). Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake Fluid Check (page 210). Engine coolant reservoir . See Engine Coolant Check (page 206). Engine compartment fuse box.

  • Page 206: Under Hood Overview — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Maintenance Power steering fluid reservoir . See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210). Washer fluid reservoir . See Washer Fluid Check (page 210). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL E174603 Air cleaner.

  • Page 207: Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.5L

    Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.5L ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL E71362 E174604 Minimum Minimum Maximum Maximum ENGINE OIL CHECK ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.7L Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Switch off the engine and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

  • Page 208: Changing The Engine Oil And Oil Filter

    3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug. Remove the engine oil filler cap. 4. Refill the engine with new oil that 2. Add engine oil that meets Ford meets Ford specifications. See specifications. See Capacities and Capacities and Specifications (page Specifications (page 265).

  • Page 209: Engine Coolant Check

    Maintenance Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring • Sustained high-speed driving at Gross System Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum loaded weight for vehicle operation). The indicator lamp will • Sustained use of diesel fuel other than illuminate when the engine oil ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD). and oil filter requires changing.

  • Page 210: Recycled Engine Coolant

    Use prediluted engine relief cap. The cooling system is under coolant meeting the Ford specification. pressure; steam and hot liquid can come See Capacities and Specifications out forcefully when the cap is loosened (page 265).

  • Page 211: Severe Climates

    If you drive in extremely cold climates: The service engine soon • It may be necessary to have a Ford indicator will illuminate. authorized dealer increase the coolant If the engine reaches a preset concentration above 50%.

  • Page 212: Automatic Transmission Fluid Check

    Maintenance The engine is capable of completely amount of speed reduction will depend on shutting down automatically to prevent the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient engine damage, if this situation occurs: temperature and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe You can continue to drive your vehicle to do so and switch the ignition off.

  • Page 213: Brake Fluid Check

    Maintenance Adding Power Steering Fluid Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid and filter at Remove the filler cap. the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 433). Your 2. Add power steering fluid to the MAX transmission does not consume fluid.

  • Page 214: Changing The Fuel Filter

    Maintenance E184430 E177378 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Attach a tube to the drain plug and 3. Rotate the housing counterclockwise place the end of the tube into a to the unlock position. suitable container. 4. Remove the housing and filter. 2.

  • Page 215: Fuel Filter — Gasoline

    3. Open the Schrader valve. 8. Purge air from the system. 4. Switch the ignition on until a steady Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford stream of fuel can be seen coming out specification. See Fuel and Refueling of the tube.

  • Page 216: Changing The 12V Battery

    Maintenance CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY Removing the Battery WARNINGS You must replace your vehicle battery with one of exactly the same specification. Make sure the battery box is correctly sealed. Your vehicle battery is heavy; take care when lifting and removing. E152529 Note: If you have power seats and the 2.

  • Page 217
    Maintenance E146773 5. Remove the battery clamp bolts. 6. Remove the battery clamp and cover. E162775 8. Remove the cable securing clips from the cover. Release the retaining clips and remove the cover. E162774 Remove the battery terminal cover. E162776 9.
  • Page 218: Checking The Wiper Blades

    Maintenance Install in the reverse order. Note: The windshield wiper blades are different in length. If you install wiper blades of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not CHECKING THE WIPER work correctly. BLADES ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the aim of the headlamp beam checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 219: Removing A Headlamp

    Maintenance Note: To see a clearer light pattern while 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each adjusting one headlamp, you may want to headlamp. Use a suitable tool, for block the light from the other headlamp. example a screwdriver or hexagonal socket, to turn the adjuster clockwise 3.

  • Page 220: Changing A Bulb

    Maintenance WARNINGS Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 221). The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

  • Page 221
    Maintenance Side Marker Lamp Headlamp Low Beam and Daytime Running Lamp E175740 E175742 Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 216). Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 216). 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 2.
  • Page 222
    Maintenance Side Direction Indicator 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. (If Equipped) Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Front Clearance Lamp E169209 Remove the large mirror glass. Tilt the mirror glass fully up, pull the mirror glass toward you from the bottom.
  • Page 223
    Maintenance License Plate Lamp E175745 E72789 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise Carefully release the spring clip. and remove it. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Pull the bulb straight out Interior Lamp Vehicles with Interior Sensors E175746 Tail and brake lamp.
  • Page 224: Bulb Specification Chart

    Maintenance Reading Lamps Vehicles without Interior Sensors Vehicles with Interior Sensors E99453 Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. E72786 3. Remove the bulb. Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise Sun Visor Mirror Lamp and remove it.

  • Page 225
    Maintenance Lamp Specification Power (watt) Front I.D. lamp Front side marker lamp High beam headlamp and Daytime 9005 running lamp License plate lamp Low beam headlamp Rear clearance lamp Reversing lamp 3057K Side direction indicator Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an authorized dealer if they fail.
  • Page 226: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.5L

    Maintenance 2. Clean the area around the air tube to CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR air filter cover connection to prevent FILTER — 3.5L debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube WARNING clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube.

  • Page 227: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.7L

    Maintenance 2. Clean the area around the air tube to CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR air filter cover connection to prevent FILTER — 3.7L debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube WARNING clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube.

  • Page 228: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Maintenance Only use the specified air filter. See CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR Capacities and Specifications (page FILTER — 3.2L POWER STROKE 265). DIESEL Change the air filter element and foam filler at the proper interval. See Scheduled WARNING Maintenance (page 433). To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner…

  • Page 229
    Maintenance E177562 4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 5. Install a new air filter element. Make sure that the groove seal on the pleated paper filter traps both sides of the vertical partition of the air box.
  • Page 230: Vehicle Care

    Vehicle Care CLEANING PRODUCTS WARNINGS Prior to using a car wash facility For best results, use the following products check the suitability of it for your or products of equivalent quality: vehicle. • Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover Some car wash installations use (ZC-42) water at high pressure.

  • Page 231: Waxing

    Vehicle Care • Do not allow wax to come in contact WARNINGS with any non-body (low-gloss black) Do not apply cleaning product to hot colored trim. The wax will discolor or surfaces and do not leave cleaning stain the parts over time. product on chrome surfaces for a •…

  • Page 232: Cleaning The Windows And Wiper Blades

    Vehicle Care Safety Belts • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or WARNINGS the area in and around these locations. Do not use abrasives, or chemical • Cover the battery, power distribution solvents to clean them.

  • Page 233: Repairing Minor Paint Damage

    Vehicle Care Clean the instrument panel and cluster 4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not lens with a clean, damp, white cotton soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the cloth, then use a clean and dry white area by using a rubbing motion for 60 cotton cloth to dry these areas.

  • Page 234: Vehicle Storage

    Vehicle Care Body Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to their condition we recommend that you: remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from • Clean the wheels weekly using exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.

  • Page 235: Cooling System

    Vehicle Care Cooling system • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected • Protect against freezing temperatures. during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. •…

  • Page 236: Wheels And Tires

    Wheels and Tires How Your Vehicle Differs from GENERAL INFORMATION Other Vehicles Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can Truck Owners differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: WARNINGS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types…

  • Page 237: Tire Care

    Grades The United States of America TIRE CARE Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to Information About Uniform give you the following information Tire Quality Grades about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.

  • Page 238
    Wheels and Tires graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A performance of tires depends (the highest), B and C, upon the actual conditions of their representing the tire’s resistance use, however, and may depart to the generation of heat and its significantly from the norm due to ability to dissipate heat when variations in driving habits, service…
  • Page 239
    Wheels and Tires • Standard load: A class of • Recommended inflation P-metric or Metric tires pressure: The cold inflation designed to carry a maximum pressure found on the Safety load at set pressure. For Compliance Certification Label example: for P-metric tires (affixed to either the door hinge 35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi pillar, door-latch post, or the…
  • Page 240
    Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a United States of America DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. P Type Tires P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating.
  • Page 241
    Wheels and Tires 15: Indicates the wheel or United States of rim diameter in inches. If America DOT Tire you change the wheel Identification Number size, you will have to (TIN): This begins with purchase new tires to the letters DOT and match the new wheel indicates that the tire diameter.
  • Page 242
    Wheels and Tires manufacturers also must as measured under indicate the ply materials controlled conditions on in the tire and the specified government test sidewall, which include surfaces of asphalt and steel, nylon, polyester, concrete. A tire marked C and others. may have poor traction performance.
  • Page 243
    Wheels and Tires Note: If the tire size does not begin the driver door. The cold with a letter, this may mean it is inflation pressure should designated by either ETRTO never be set lower than (European Tire and Rim Technical the recommended Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire pressure on the vehicle…
  • Page 244
    Wheels and Tires 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
  • Page 245
    Wheels and Tires Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
  • Page 246
    Wheels and Tires four numbers represent the week Safe operation of your vehicle and year the tire was built. For requires that the tires are correctly example, the numbers 317 mean inflated. the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 Every day before you drive, check the numbers go to four digits.
  • Page 247
    Compliance Certification Label or of your vehicle. If you do not Tire Label. maintain the tire pressures as specified by Ford, your vehicle may When weather temperature experience a condition known as changes occur, tire inflation shimmy. This will cause severe pressures also change.
  • Page 248
    Wheels and Tires 6. Visually inspect the tires to Note: Some spare tires operate at make sure there are no nails or a higher inflation pressure than the other objects embedded that other tires. For T-type mini-spare could poke a hole in the tire tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare and cause an air leak.
  • Page 249
    Wheels and Tires Incorrect or inadequate vehicle Tire Damage maintenance can cause tires to Periodically inspect the tire treads wear abnormally. Inspect all the and sidewalls for damage, for tires, including the spare, example bulges in the tread or frequently, and replace them if sidewalls, cracks in the tread one or more of the following groove or separation in the tread…
  • Page 250
    Use of any tire or wheel not exceed the maximum pressure not recommended by Ford can indicated on the sidewall of the affect the safety and performance tire to set the beads without…
  • Page 251
    Driving habits have a great deal to System (If Equipped) do with your tire mileage and The use of wheels or tires not safety: recommended by Ford Motor • Observe posted speed limits. Company may affect the • Avoid fast starts, stops and operation of the tire pressure turns.
  • Page 252
    Wheels and Tires If you feel a sudden vibration or Tire Rotation ride disturbance while driving, or WARNING you suspect a tire or your vehicle has been damaged, immediately If the tire label shows reduce your speed. Drive with different tire pressures for the caution until you can safely pull front and rear tires and the vehicle off the road.
  • Page 253: Using Winter Tires

    Wheels and Tires Note: Your vehicle may have a Rear-wheel drive and dissimilar spare wheel and tire four-wheel drive vehicles with assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel dual rear wheels. and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels.

  • Page 254: Using Snow Chains

    • Avoid fully loading your vehicle. • Only certain snow chains or cables have been approved by Ford as safe for use on vehicles with either 235/65 R16C or 195/75 R16C tires. • Snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.

  • Page 255
    Wheels and Tires Each tire, including the spare (if When the malfunction indicator is provided), should be checked illuminated, the system may not be able monthly when cold and inflated to detect or signal low tire pressure as to the inflation pressure intended.
  • Page 256
    Wheels and Tires You should always have your tires serviced When the Temporary Spare Tire is by an authorized dealer. Installed Check the tire pressure periodically (at If one of the road wheels and tire needs to least monthly) using an accurate tire be replaced with the temporary spare gauge.
  • Page 257: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

    Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure Possible cause Action required warning light Tire rotation without On vehicles with different front and rear sensor training tire pressures, you must retrain the system following every tire rotation. See Tire Care (page 234). Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the system malfunction…

  • Page 258
    Decrease the least three feet (one meter) away from air pressure until the horn chirps. another Ford vehicle undergoing the Note: The single horn chirp confirms that system reset procedure. the sensor identification code has been •…
  • Page 259: Changing A Road Wheel

    If you must use a sealant, the by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be is damaged, it should be replaced rather used.

  • Page 260: Locking Lug Nuts

    Wheels and Tires When driving with one of the dissimilar The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare spare tires listed above, do not: wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) •…

  • Page 261
    Wheels and Tires Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire pressure monitoring system, the warning indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel to your vehicle. To restore the correct operation of the tire pressure monitoring system, you must have the repaired road wheel and tire assembly refitted to your vehicle.
  • Page 262
    Wheels and Tires E184880 Insert the flat end of the lug wrench into the socket. Turn counterclockwise E146813 until the spare wheel rests on the 4. Remove the retaining nut to release ground and the cable is loose. the spare wheel bracket. Vehicles With a Spare Wheel Chassis Cab and Cutaway The spare wheel is under the rear of your…
  • Page 263: Vehicle Jack

    Wheels and Tires Vehicle Jack WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack. To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P), set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is…

  • Page 264: Rear Jacking Points

    Wheels and Tires Vehicle Jack Storage The vehicle jack is under the passenger seat. The jack handle and lug wrench are located in a storage compartment in the front right-hand side stepwell. Note: The vehicle jack is in the load space area on vehicles with rear climate control.

  • Page 265: Removing A Road Wheel

    Wheels and Tires WARNINGS Chock the diagonally opposite wheel to the punctured tire with an appropriate block or wheel chock. A wheel chock may be located in the B-pillar or in a storage compartment in the front right-hand side stepwell. Make sure that the arrows on directional tires point in the direction of rotation when your vehicle is…

  • Page 266: Stowing The Wheel And Vehicle Jack

    Wheels and Tires 4. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the WARNINGS sequence shown. See Technical Make sure the wheel and hub Specifications (page 264). contact surfaces are free from 5. Install the wheel trim. foreign material. Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug Never use wheels or lug nuts nuts are against the wheel.

  • Page 267: Technical Specifications

    M14 x 1.5 148 lb.ft (200 Nm) Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.

  • Page 268: Capacities And Specifications

    Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.5L Engine 3.5L V6 Ecoboost Cubic inches Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap .030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm) Compression ratio 10.0:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.5L V6 Ecoboost Engines with A/C E167467 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.7L Engine…

  • Page 269: Engine Specifications — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing 3.7L V6 Engines with A/C E167464 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL Engine 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Cubic inches Required fuel No. 2 Diesel Firing order 1-2-4-5-3 Compression ratio 15.4:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Engines with E175582 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 270: Motorcraft Parts — 3.5L

    Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 271: Motorcraft Parts — 3.7L

    Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 272: Motorcraft Parts — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 273: Vehicle Identification Number

    Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Make, vehicle line, series, body NUMBER type Engine type The vehicle identification number is Check digit located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. Model year Assembly plant Production sequence number VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification…

  • Page 274: Transmission Code Designation

    Capacities and Specifications The transmission code is on the Safety TRANSMISSION CODE Compliance Certification Label. The DESIGNATION following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Code Description Six-speed automatic trans- mission 6R80 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS — 3.5L WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a…

  • Page 275: Capacities And Specifications

    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventila- 2.43 lb (1.1 kg) tion and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating, 1.76 lb (0.8 kg) ventilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent- 9.5 fl oz (280 ml) ilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,…

  • Page 276
    Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12 Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV…
  • Page 277: Capacities And Specifications — 3.7L

    Capacities and Specifications Only use fluid that meets Ford Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High specifications. Motor oils of the Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, recommended viscosity grade that meet meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925 API SN requirements and display the API Class 6.

  • Page 278
    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary 16.4 qt (15.5 L) heater Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary 14.9 qt (14.1 L) heater 13.1 qt (12.4 L) 2, 3 Automatic transmission Fuel tank 20.9 gal (95 L) Windshield and rear window washer system –…
  • Page 279
    Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2 Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B Engine coolant (Canada):…
  • Page 280
    YN-12-D Grease: ESA-M1C75-B Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. Motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines are also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled…
  • Page 281: Capacities And Specifications — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Capacities and Specifications Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High • Reduced fuel economy. Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, • Degraded brake performance. meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may CAPACITIES AND cause brake system damage. SPECIFICATIONS — 3.2L Use multi-purpose grease for door latches, hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch…

  • Page 282
    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating, 1.76 lb (0.8 kg) ventilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent- 9.5 fl oz (280 ml) ilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating, 5.4 fl oz (160 ml) ventilation and air conditioning Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.
  • Page 283
    Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12 Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid XT-10-QLVC Power steering fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12…
  • Page 284
    Capacities and Specifications If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grades this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. •…
  • Page 285: Audio System

    Audio systems capable of recognizing and compact discs may not function correctly playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks when used in Ford CD players. and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3…

  • Page 286: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm

    Audio System • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder).

  • Page 287: Audio System

    Audio System E175058 Display: Shows the status of the current mode selected. Clock: Press the button to select clock setup. Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band. Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band.

  • Page 288: Clock Button

    Audio System Radio: Press the button to select different radio frequency bands. Press to cancel the menu or list browsing. Cursor up or down: Press the cursor up or down arrow buttons to adjust the settings within the menus or to move to the next radio station while listening to the radio on the FM or AM frequency band.

  • Page 289: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Premium Am/Fm/Cd

    Audio System Station Preset Buttons 2. Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to select the required level. This feature allows you to store your Note: Fade settings are only adjustable if favorite stations. They can be recalled by there are speakers in the rear of your vehicle.

  • Page 290
    Audio System E177140 — TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency band. Mute: Press the button to mute the sound. DISP: Press this button to switch the display screen off. SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or the next or previous track on a CD.
  • Page 291: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm/Cd/Sync

    Audio System Note: You can operate your audio system AUDIO UNIT — VEHICLES WITH: for up to one hour after you switch the AM/FM/CD/SYNC ignition off. Press the on and off control to operate the system with the ignition turned WARNING off.

  • Page 292
    Audio System Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections. Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information. TUNE — and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band.
  • Page 293: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm/Cd/Sync/Satellite Radio

    Audio System Note: You can operate your audio system AUDIO UNIT — VEHICLES WITH: for up to one hour after you switch the AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE ignition off. Press the on and off control to RADIO operate the system with the ignition turned off.

  • Page 294
    Audio System Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections. Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information. TUNE — and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band.
  • Page 295: Digital Radio

    Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you DIGITAL RADIO can access the following functions: Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you available in all markets. can access the following functions: HD Radio technology is the digital •…

  • Page 296
    Audio System HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
  • Page 297: Satellite Radio

    SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks news, sports, weather, traffic and of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor entertainment satellite radio channels. For Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not more information and a complete list of…

  • Page 298: Satellite Radio Reception Factors

    Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer responsible for any such programming for availability.

  • Page 299
    Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This two seconds to produce message should disappear audio for the selected shortly. channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not or system failure present.
  • Page 300: Audio Input Jack

    Audio System The audio input jack allows you to connect AUDIO INPUT JACK and play music from a portable music player through your vehicle speakers. You WARNINGS can use any portable music player Driving while distracted can result in designed for use with headphones. The loss of vehicle control, crash and audio extension cable must have a 0.14 in injury.

  • Page 301: Media Hub

    Audio System The USB port allows you to plug in media WARNINGS playing devices, memory sticks and charge against the use of any hand-held device devices (if supported). See (page 300). while driving and encourage the use of The extension cable must be long enough voice-operated systems when possible.

  • Page 302: Audio Troubleshooting

    Audio System AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING Message Description and Action Please check CD General error message for CD fault conditions. For example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try, or replace disc with known music disc. If the error persists contact an authorized dealer.

  • Page 303: Sync

    SYNC GENERAL INFORMATION E142598 • Use the advanced voice recognition SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device portable media player. This allows you to: supports this).

  • Page 304
    SYNC Times are subject to change due to When using SYNC: holidays. • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split SYNC Owner Account or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere Why do I need a SYNC owner account? with the operation of pedals, seats, •…
  • Page 305: Using Voice Recognition

    Make sure the interior of your vehicle is vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor as quiet as possible. Wind noise from Company and Ford of Canada will not open windows and road vibrations may access the system data for any purpose…

  • Page 306
    SYNC Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following (phone | Blackberry | Make calls. iPhone | Mobile) Services Access the SYNC Services portal. SYNC Return to the main menu. (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 Access the device connected to your USB port.
  • Page 307
    SYNC When prompted say the following: Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following voice settings Followed by either of the following: interaction mode novice Provide more detailed interaction and guidance. interaction mode Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts. advanced The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
  • Page 308: Using Sync With Your Phone

    SYNC Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following media candidate lists off Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may still occasionally be asked questions. media candidate lists on Clarify your voice command for media candidates. phone candidate lists off Make a best guess from the phone candidate list.

  • Page 309
    SYNC Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired, do the following: Message Action and Description No Phone Paired Press the OK button. When the following message appears in the display. Find SYNC Press the OK button. 2.
  • Page 310: Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones

    SYNC Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Action Phone settings Press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices Press the OK button. Add Device Press the OK button. When the following message appears in the display. Find SYNC Press the OK button.

  • Page 311
    SYNC Voice Command Action Call [name] at cell You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone. This command is not available until your cell phone informa- tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Call [name] at other You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone. This command is not available until your cell phone informa- tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
  • Page 312
    SYNC Voice Command Action Phonebook <name> at This command is not available until your cell phone informa- tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. cell Phonebook <name> at This command is not available until your cell phone informa- other tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |.
  • Page 313: Making A Call

    SYNC Voice Command Action Plus Star Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press MENU to go to the phone menu. Voice Command Phone Menu Commands (Phone) settings (set) ringer 3 Voice Command (Phone) settings (set) ringer off (Phone) connections Battery (Phone) settings (message) notification…

  • Page 314: Receiving Calls

    SYNC Receiving Calls Phone Options during an Active Call When receiving a call, you can: During an active call, you have more menu • Answer the call by pressing the phone features that become available, for button. example putting a call on hold or joining •…

  • Page 315
    SYNC Message Action and Description Call History To access your call history log. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the display.
  • Page 316
    SYNC Message Action and Description Phonebook Access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phonebook If your phonebook has less than 255 entries, they appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255 entries, the system will organize them into alphabetical categories.
  • Page 317
    SYNC Text Messaging Receiving a Text Message When a new text message arrives, an SYNC allows you to receive, send, audible tone sounds and the information download and delete text messages. The display indicates you have a new message. system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have Note: This is a cell phone-dependent to take your eyes off the road.
  • Page 318
    6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you would like to send the message. The system sends each text message with the following signature: This message was sent from my Ford. Unsupported If the system detects your cell phone does not support any feature, this message will appear in the information display.
  • Page 319: Accessing Your Phone Settings

    SYNC Message Pre-defined text messages Where R you? Message I need more directions Can’t talk right now I love you Call me Too funny :-) Call you later Can’t wait to see you Be there in 10 minutes Stuck in traffic. Be there in 20 minutes Accessing Your Phone Settings These are cell phone-dependent features.

  • Page 320
    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the OK button to select th desired ring tone. If your cell phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose the phone ringer option. Text Message Notifica- You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you tion when a text message arrives.
  • Page 321
    SYNC System Settings Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you This menu provides access to your to add, connect and delete devices, set a Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu cell phone as primary as well as turn your features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll Bluetooth feature on and off.
  • Page 322
    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the OK button. Return Exit the current menu. This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the previous one is disconnected.
  • Page 323: Sync Applications And Services

    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the following message appears in the display. Restore Defaults? Master reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return the system to the factory default settings.

  • Page 324
    SYNC Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, WARNINGS that setting applies for all paired phones. If Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice emergency call if you can do it message plays or a display message (or yourself.
  • Page 325
    SYNC Off selections include: Before making the call: • Off with reminder: Provides a display • SYNC provides a short window of time and voice reminder at phone (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. connection at vehicle start. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
  • Page 326
    Action and Description vehicle [health] report The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information, open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
  • Page 327
    Run Report Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information, open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
  • Page 328
    SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Note: This feature does not function Ford or its service providers to collect your properly if you have enabled caller ID vehicle travel information or other blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure…
  • Page 329
    SYNC Voice command Action and Description Services To return to the Services main menu. Help Receive system help. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say; options or choices.
  • Page 330
    SYNC Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description Directions To receive directions to a location. Once you select your destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
  • Page 331: Sync Mobile Apps

    Note: For information on available apps, The system enables voice and steering supported smartphone devices and wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford smartphone apps. Once an app is running website. through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls.

  • Page 332
    SYNC Note: Make sure you have an active account Note: AppLink is not available if your for the app that you have downloaded. vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch Some apps work automatically with no system. setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites.
  • Page 333
    • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel any damages or loss of privacy relating to consumption, engine speed, rain…
  • Page 334
    This includes Data is sent to Ford in the United States any additional charges incurred due to through the connected device. The driving in areas when roaming out of a home information is encrypted and includes your network.
  • Page 335: Player

    SYNC Connecting Your Digital Media USING SYNC WITH YOUR Player to the USB Port MEDIA PLAYER Note: If your digital media player has a You can access and play music from your power switch, make sure you switch it on digital music player over your vehicle’s before plugging it in.

  • Page 336: What’s Playing

    SYNC Message Action and Description Select one of the following: Play all Artist Albums Genres Playlists Tracks Browse USB Similar music Return Exit the current menu. What’s Playing? When a track is playing, you can ask the system to tell you what is currently playing. Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description…

  • Page 337: Media Voice Commands

    SYNC Media Voice Commands Voice command Press the voice button and when Refine song <name> prompted say any of the following: Refine track <name> Voice command repeat (track | song) [on] (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) repeat off Autoplay Off (browse | search | show) album Autoplay [on]…

  • Page 338
    SYNC Voice Command Guide Voice command Action and Description Autoplay Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your music. (browse | search | show) The system searches all the data from your indexed music all (genre | genres) and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.
  • Page 339: Media Menu Features

    SYNC Bluetooth Audio Command Guide Voice command Press the voice button and when [play] next track prompted say any of the following: [play] previous track Voice command Media Menu Features [Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec- tions | [Bluetooth] Connections The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play your music, for pause example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,…

  • Page 340: Accessing Your Play Menu

    SYNC Message Action and Description Select one of the following: Shuffle Press the OK button to shuffle available media files in the current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle. Repeat Press the OK button to repeat any song.

  • Page 341
    SYNC Press the AUX button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description Menu Press the OK button to enter the media menu. Select one of the following: Play all Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the display.
  • Page 342
    SYNC Message Action and Description Tracks Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button. Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port.
  • Page 343
    SYNC Press the AUX button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description Menu Press the OK button to enter the media menu. Settings Press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices Press the OK button. Select one of the following: Add Device Pair more devices to the system.
  • Page 344
    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the OK button. 2. Press the OK button to confirm. Return Exit the current menu. This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features.
  • Page 345: Sync Troubleshooting

    SYNC Message Action and Description Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices. Press the OK button. 2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in the display, press the OK button again to confirm.

  • Page 346
    SYNC Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) This may be a possible Try turning off the device, phone malfunction. resetting the device or removing the device’s battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature.
  • Page 347
    SYNC Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device’s firm- ware. Turn off the Auto phone- book download setting. Text messaging is not This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review…
  • Page 348
    SYNC USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Make sure that the device does not have an auto- install program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not my device when I turn on the leaving the device in your car.
  • Page 349
    SYNC Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account. I am unable to retrieve the The preferred dealer When you register your report on the website, or I information did not load account, you must choose a…
  • Page 350
    SYNC Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong Review the phone voice what I am saying. voice commands. commands and the media You may be speaking too voice commands at the soon or at the wrong time.
  • Page 351
    SYNC Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be Make sure you are saying the reading the name the same contacts exactly as they are way you are saying it. listed. For example, if you Contacts in your phonebook save a contact as Joe may be very short and…
  • Page 352: Myford Touch

    MyFord Touch GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle.

  • Page 353: Myford Touch

    MyFord Touch PHONE Press to select any of the following: Press to select any of the following: Message Message Clock Phone Display Quick Dial Sound Phonebook Vehicle History Settings Messaging Help Settings HOME NAVIGATION Press to access the home screen. Press to select any of the following: E142613 Note: Depending on your vehicle s option…

  • Page 354
    MyFord Touch ENTERTAINMENT Message Press to select any of the following: Message BT Stereo SD Card SIRIUS Line In Using the Audio Controls Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls: Message Action and Description Power Switch the media features on or off. Vol: Adjust the volume of playing media.
  • Page 355
    MyFord Touch Using the Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls: Control Action and Description Adjust the volume of playing media. Seek Use as you normally would in media modes. Voice Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice prompt and begin speaking.
  • Page 356
    MyFord Touch Speed-restricted Features • Make sure the power cables do not interfere with the safe operation of your Some features of this system are restricted vehicle’s controls or affect your safe from use unless your vehicle is stationary. driving abilities. •…
  • Page 357
    System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your main menu vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not List of commands access the system data for any purpose (what are my (options | choices) | what…
  • Page 358
    MyFord Touch You can say any of the voice commands Voice command that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; [main menu] help cancel or stop or exit.
  • Page 359
    MyFord Touch Voice Command Settings Using the touchscreen, press: These allow you to customize the level of system interaction, help and feedback. The Message system defaults to standard interaction Settings that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level Help of guidance and feedback.
  • Page 360: Settings

    MyFord Touch Voice command Using the steering wheel control, press the voice button and when prompted media candidate lists on say one of the following: media candidate lists off Voice command voice settings help interaction mode novice Using Voice Commands with the interaction mode advanced Touchscreen Options confirmation prompts on…

  • Page 361
    MyFord Touch Clock Item Message Under this menu, you can set the clock, access and adjust the display, sound and Clock vehicle settings as well as access settings Display for specific modes or the help feature. Sound Vehicle E142607 Settings Help To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message…
  • Page 362
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Mode Allows you to turn the display off. It also allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system auto- matically change based on the outside light level. If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning the display’s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
  • Page 363
    MyFord Touch Vehicle To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message E142607 Settings To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Sound Message Then select from the following: Settings Bass Vehicle Midrange Then select from the following: Treble Vehicle Health Set Balance and Fade Rear View Camera Occupancy Mode Enable Valet Mode…
  • Page 364
    MyFord Touch Camera Settings This menu allows you to access settings E142607 for your rear view camera. To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Press the settings icon. Vehicle Rear View Camera Camera Settings Then select from the following: Enhanced Park Aids Rear Camera Delay You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter.
  • Page 365
    MyFord Touch To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Press the settings icon. System Then select from the following: Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
  • Page 366
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request. Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings. Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands.
  • Page 367
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Gracenote® Database This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Info Database. Gracenote® Mgmt With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files. This overrides information from your device. This feature defaults to off. Cover Art Priority With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files.
  • Page 368
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti- fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
  • Page 369
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes. Choose a Wireless Network Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength.
  • Page 370
    MyFord Touch The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Help E142607 E142626 To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Press the settings icon. Help Then select from the following: Where Am I? View your vehicle’s current location, if your vehicle is equipped with navigation.
  • Page 371: Entertainment

    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.

  • Page 372
    MyFord Touch Voice command Messa g e Message and Description Browse SD card AM 1 and AM AST Browse Sirius channel guide FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST Browse USB SIRIUS Help If you only say browse, you can then say BT Stereo any commands in the following chart.
  • Page 373: Am/Fm Radio

    MyFord Touch SIRIUS station (for example, «the Voice command Highway»). The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice Sirius <0-223> session no matter which current audio source you are listening to (for example a Sports games USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio).

  • Page 374
    MyFord Touch Options player, the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are Sound Settings connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to Touch this button to adjust settings download. See HD Radio information later for: in this chapter.
  • Page 375
    MyFord Touch on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in E142616 The HD logo either blinks when acquiring analog and digital broadcasts.
  • Page 376
    MyFord Touch When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: Message Action and Description Scan Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels.
  • Page 377
    MyFord Touch In order to provide the best possible technology. Independent entities own and experience, use the contact form to report operate each station. These stations are any station issues found while listening to responsible for ensuring all audio streams a station broadcasting with HD Radio and data fields are accurate.
  • Page 378
    HD Radio and the HD and FM autoset preset <#> HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks FM preset <#> of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not FM 1 responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology.
  • Page 379
    MyFord Touch Voice command To turn the feature on press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then AM preset <#> select: Message FM <87.9-107.9> SIRIUS FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#> Memory Presets FM autoset Save a channel by pressing and holding FM autoset preset <#>…
  • Page 380
    Treble channel. Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert Set Balance and Fade feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation. Occupancy Mode Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
  • Page 381
    United States, at any time, with or without notice to you. www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at Ford Motor Company shall not be 1-888-539-7474. responsible for any such programming Note: This receiver includes the eCos changes.
  • Page 382
    MyFord Touch SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-…
  • Page 383
    MyFord Touch Troubleshooting tips Message Cause Action Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539- longer available. 7474 to resolve subscription 1-888-539-7474 issues. None found All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on Check Channel Guide…
  • Page 384: Sd Card Slot And Usb Port

    MyFord Touch Sports Game Voice command Tune to the <college name> game Tune to the <team city> game Tune to the <team city> <team name> game Tune to the <team name> game E142619 Help The SD card slot is located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel.

  • Page 385
    MyFord Touch This feature allows you to plug in media Playing Music from Your Device playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives Note: The system is capable of indexing up or thumb drives, and charge devices if they to 30,000 songs. support this feature.
  • Page 386
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Speed Compensated Volume Media Player Settings Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media Player. See Settings (page 357). Device Information Displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device. Update Media Index Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and each time the content changes (for example adding or…
  • Page 387
    MyFord Touch Voice command Voice command play Repeat off play [album] [by [artist]] Repeat one play all shuffle [all] [on] play [artist] Shuffle album Play audiobook <name> shuffle off Play author <name> What’s this? Play composer <name> Help Play folder <name> If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system prompts play [genre]…
  • Page 388: Bluetooth Audio

    MyFord Touch It is also able to organize your indexed Voice command media from your playing device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are All songs descriptive software identifiers embedded All TV shows in the media files, provide information about the file. All video playlists If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata…

  • Page 389
    MyFord Touch Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Next song play pause [play] previous track E142622 The A/V inputs allow you to connect an A/V Inputs auxiliary audio/video source (for example gaming systems or a personal camcorder) WARNINGS by connecting RCA cords (not included) Driving while distracted can result in…
  • Page 390: Phone

    MyFord Touch 3. Press the lower left corner on the Troubleshooting touchscreen. Select a tuned FM station. • Do not connect the audio input jack to 4. Adjust the volume as desired. a line level output. The jack only works correctly with devices that have a 5.

  • Page 391
    MyFord Touch Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook Item Message download, are cell phone-dependent Phone features. To check your cell phone’s compatibility, see your cell phone’s user Quick Dial manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or Phonebook www.syncmaroute.ca.
  • Page 392: Making Calls

    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone.

  • Page 393
    MyFord Touch Phone Menu Options Press the voice button and when Press the top left corner on the prompted say: touchscreen to select from the following Voice command options: Call <name> Phone dial [[a] number] Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a To end the call or exit phone number and place a call.
  • Page 394
    MyFord Touch Text Messaging To turn on contact picture settings, if Note: Downloading and sending text your device supports this feature, messages using Bluetooth are cell select: phone-dependent features. Message Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available Phone when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over Settings…
  • Page 395
    MyFord Touch To compose and send a text message, select: Message Action and Description Phone Messaging Send Text Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook. Edit Text Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create a message on your own. Send Sends the message as it is.
  • Page 396: Phone Settings

    MyFord Touch Phone Settings To enter the phone settings menu select: Message Action and Description Phone Settings Then any of the following: Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite. Bluetooth To turn Bluetooth off or on.

  • Page 397: Phone Voice Commands

    MyFord Touch Phone Voice Commands Voice command Listen to text messages E142599 Messages Press the voice button and when mute [call] [on] prompted say any of the following: Pair phone Voice command Privacy on Call call (someone | [[a] name]) Read text message Call <name>…

  • Page 398: Information

    Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn Under the information menu, you can directions available in select markets. access the following features: Message and data rates may apply. Ford Message Motor Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service at any…

  • Page 399
    Note: This feature does not function www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want properly if you have enabled caller ID Ford or its service providers to collect your blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure vehicle travel information or other your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID information identified in the Terms and before using SYNC Services.
  • Page 400
    MyFord Touch Connecting to SYNC Services Using addresses by street address or by the Touchscreen name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC Services subscription. For more Navigation, press the information on Operator Assist, visit E142608 Information button.
  • Page 401
    MyFord Touch SYNC Services Quick Tips Message Action and Description Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information. You can save address points, such as work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams, for example Detroit Lions, or a news category.
  • Page 402
    Sirius Travel Link. schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible access. The score automatically refreshes for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius when a game is in progress.
  • Page 403
    MyFord Touch Voice command Voice command Weather map College football headlines Help College football schedule College football scores If you say «Sports headlines», «Sports schedules» or «Sports scores», you can Golf headlines then say any of the commands in the following chart.
  • Page 404
    MyFord Touch 911 Assist (If Equipped) Voice command WNBA schedule WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on WNBA scores before a crash, the system will not dial for help, which could delay Help response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
  • Page 405
    MyFord Touch If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee You can also access 911 Assist by airbags and rear inflatable safety belts pressing the Setting icon and then where fitted or activates the fuel pump selecting: shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by Message dialing 911 through a paired and connected…
  • Page 406
    MyFord Touch In the Event of a Crash 911 Assist Privacy Notice Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate When you turn on 911 Assist, it may the fuel pump shut-off (which would disclose to emergency services that your trigger 911 Assist);…
  • Page 407: Navigation

    Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting. When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect your The system allows you to check your cellular phone number (to process your vehicle’s overall health in the form of a report request) and diagnostic information diagnostic report card.

  • Page 408: Setting A Destination

    MyFord Touch Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To Enter the necessary information into remove the SD card, just push the card in the highlighted text fields (in any and release it. Do not attempt to pull the order). For address destination entry, card out to remove it;…

  • Page 409: Point Of Interest (Poi) Categories

    MyFord Touch During route guidance, you can press the Message talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) Auto Dealership if you want the system to repeat route Govt Office guidance information. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it Public Transit updates the distance to the next guidance…

  • Page 410: Setting Your Navigation Preferences

    MyFord Touch Hotel Message Fitness center E143884 Internet access Coffeehouse Pool Wi-fi E142636 Food & Drink For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address. E142637 For hotels, cityseekr can provide Nightlife information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout…

  • Page 411
    MyFord Touch Parking POI Notification Navigation Preferences Set the automatic parking point of interest Guidance Prompts notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF. Have the system use Voice & Tones or When parking point of interest notification Tone Only on your programmed route. is on, the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination.
  • Page 412: Map Mode

    MyFord Touch Press Add to program an entry. Once you Heading up (2D map) always make a selection, the system tries to avoid shows the direction of forward the area(s) if possible for all routes. To travel to be upward on the screen. E142642 delete a selection, choose the listing on This view is available for map…

  • Page 413: Quick-Touch Buttons

    MyFord Touch scale. The map zoom level then Home indicates the location on synchronizes with vehicle speed. The the map currently stored as the slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther home position. You can only save E142649 the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle one address from the Address is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.

  • Page 414: Navigation Map Updates

    MyFord Touch Set as Dest Nokia is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data Touch this button to select a scrolled errors, you may report them directly to location on the map as your destination. Nokia by going to You may scroll the map by pressing your http://mapreporter.navteq.com.

  • Page 415
    MyFord Touch Voice command Voice command Destination play nametags Zoom out Destination POI Help Destination POI category These commands are only available when a navigation route is active. Destination previous destination If you say «Destination», you can then say Destination street address any command in the following «Destination»…
  • Page 416
    MyFord Touch Navigation Voice command Destination Zoom city Zoom country Zoom minimum Zoom maximum Zoom province Zoom state Zoom street Zoom to <distance> Help If you say «Destination», you can then say any command in the «Destination» chart. One-shot Destination Street Address When you say either «Navigation destination street address»…
  • Page 417: Accessories

    Ford Motor and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Company will warrant your accessory Accessories product limited warranty from through the warranty that provides the the accessory manufacturer.

  • Page 418: Auxiliary Switches

    • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect…

  • Page 419: Appendices

    The • You have acquired a device («DEVICE») additional software and services of that includes software licensed by Ford third party origin, as well as associated Motor Company and its affiliates media, printed materials, and «online»…

  • Page 420
    Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the the process. Neither FORD MOTOR recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,…
  • Page 421
    SOFTWARE («Supplemental may collect and use technical Components»). information gathered in any manner as If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party part of product support services related software and services suppliers provide or to the SOFTWARE or related services. make available to you Supplemental…
  • Page 422
    DEVICE. electronic form, you may print one copy of UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation. If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You MOTOR COMPANY separate from the acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD subject to U.S.
  • Page 423
    Adobe TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or trademarks or service marks of FORD [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] Corporation, third party software or service contains [Adobe®…
  • Page 424
    Appendices Use of Speech Recognition Functions: WARNING Speech recognition software is inherently Operating certain parts of this a statistical process which is subject to system while driving can distract errors. It is your responsibility to monitor your attention away from the road, any speech recognition functions included and possibly cause an accident or other in the system and address any errors.
  • Page 425
    Appendices Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used Telenav may revise this Agreement and by this system may be inaccurate because the privacy policy at any time, with or of changes in roads, traffic controls or without notice to you. You agree to visit driving conditions.
  • Page 426
    Appendices 2. Account Information or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) You agree: (a) when registering the violates any law, statute, ordinance or Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with regulation, including but not limited to laws true, accurate, current, and complete and regulations related to spamming, information about yourself, and (b) to…
  • Page 427
    Appendices COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY…
  • Page 428
    Appendices the terms and conditions of this Notices by posting them on Telenav’s Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or Website or by downloading such Notices transfer that is not expressly permitted to your wireless device. If you desire to under this paragraph will result in withdraw your consent to receive Notices immediate termination of this Agreement, electronically, you must discontinue your…
  • Page 429
    Appendices Agreement), and thus your use of the TERMS AND CONDITIONS Telenav Software is also subject to such License Limitations on Use: terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, You agree that your license to use this Data which are applicable to Telenav’s third is limited to and conditioned on use for party vendor licensors:…
  • Page 430
    Appendices Disclaimer of Liability: real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING with, or in communication with, including THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) without limitation, cellular phones, SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR and personal digital -assistants or PDAs.
  • Page 431
    Appendices Entire Agreement: Government End Users: These terms and conditions constitute the If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf entire agreement between HERE (and its of the United States government or any licensors, including their licensors and other entity seeking or applying rights suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject similar to those customarily claimed by the…
  • Page 432
    Appendices Gracenote® Copyright You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote («Gracenote Content») , CD and music-related data from Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 and Gracenote Servers for your own Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright personal, non-commercial use only.
  • Page 433
    Appendices THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM Vehicle with SYNC only OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED IC: 1422A-SG1G1 TO YOU «AS IS». NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, or MyLincoln Touch REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY…
  • Page 434: Extended Service Plan (Esp)

    3. BaseCARE — Covers 84 components. Transferable Coverage 4. PowertrainCARE — Covers 29 critical If you sell your vehicle before your Ford components. Extended Service Plan coverage expires, Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by you can transfer any remaining coverage all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.

  • Page 435: Scheduled Maintenance

    Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan scheduled maintenance, and selected is the only service contract backed by Ford wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so Motor Company of Canada, Limited. you never have to worry about affording Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford your vehicle’s maintenance.

  • Page 436: Scheduled Maintenance

    If you do not use Ford authorized parts they you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for may not meet our specifications and completed maintenance with your vehicle.

  • Page 437: Owner Checks And Services

    When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals the information display, it is time for an oil This owner’s manual and the Ford change. Make sure you perform the oil Workshop Manual list the recommended change within two weeks or 500 miles additives and chemicals for your vehicle.

  • Page 438: Multi-Point Inspection

    Scheduled Maintenance Multi-point inspection Check every six months Exterior lamps and hazard warning Battery connections. Clean if necessary. system operation. Body and door drain holes for obstruc- Fluid levels ; fill if necessary. tions. Clean if necessary. For oil and fluid leaks. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

  • Page 439: Normal Scheduled Maintenance

    Scheduled Maintenance important factors in its calculations, the NORMAL SCHEDULED monitor helps reduce the cost of owning MAINTENANCE your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® The following table provides examples of (Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L vehicle use and its impact on oil change Engine) intervals.

  • Page 440: Normal Maintenance Intervals

    Scheduled Maintenance Normal Maintenance Intervals 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Change engine oil and filter. Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick).

  • Page 441: Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance

    Scheduled Maintenance Other maintenance items Replace spark plugs. Every 100000 miles (160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Every 150000 miles Change rear axle fluid. (240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change.

  • Page 442
    Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery) As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
  • Page 443
    During long periods before the completion of your vehicle’s of trailer towing with outside temperatures useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open urges you to have all recommended throttle for long periods above 45 mph…
  • Page 444: Scheduled Maintenance Record

    Scheduled Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…

  • Page 445
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 446
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 447
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 448
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 449
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 450
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 451
    Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014…
  • Page 452
    Index Audio Control — Vehicles Without: Touchscreen Display……..61 Seek, Next or Previous……..62 Audio Input Jack………..297 See: Climate Control……….89 Audio System……….282 About This Manual………..7 General Information………282 Protecting the Environment……..7 Audio Troubleshooting……299 Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ See: Brakes…………137 SYNC/Satellite Radio……290 ABS driving hints Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock…
  • Page 453
    Index Brakes…………..137 Changing the 12V Battery……213 General Information………..137 Installing the Battery………214 Breaking-In…………173 Removing the Battery……..213 Bulb Specification Chart……221 Changing the Engine Air Filter — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel………225 Changing the Engine Air Filter — 3.5L…………..223 California Proposition 65……10 Changing the Engine Air Filter — Capacities and Specifications — 3.2L 3.7L…………..224 Power Stroke Diesel………278…
  • Page 454
    Index Climate Control……….89 Emission Control System……122 Principle of Operation……..89 Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation Catalyst Cold Weather Precautions……174 And Diesel Particulate Filter System Coolant Check …………….124 See: Engine Coolant Check……206 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..42 Tampering Acts and Maintenance..132 Creating a MyKey……….47 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)….123 Programming/Changing Configurable…
  • Page 455
    Fuel Gauge…………..74 Safety Belt Locking Modes…….29 Information Display……….73 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy…28 Tripmeter Reset and Distance to Floor Mats…………174 Empty…………..74 Ford Credit…………10 General Information on Radio Frequencies………..44 (U.S. Only)……………10 Fuel and Refueling………111 General Maintenance Information..433 Fuel Consumption……..122 Multi-point Inspection……..435 Calculating Fuel Economy…….122…
  • Page 456
    Index Head Restraints……….95 Installing Child Seats……..14 Adjusting the Head Restraint……96 Child Seats……………14 Installing the Head Restraint ……96 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts……15 Removing the Head Restraint……96 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Heated Windows and Mirrors….93 Children (LATCH)……….17 Heated Exterior Mirrors……..93 Using Tether Straps……….19 Instrument Cluster………73 Heated Rear Window………93…
  • Page 457
    Index Locking and Unlocking………54 Automatic Locking……….57 Automatic Re-Locking……..57 Navigation………….404 Automatic Unlocking………..57 cityseekr……………406 Configurable Unlocking……..58 Map Mode…………409 Locking…………..54 Navigation Map Updates……..411 Locking and Unlocking Confirmation…54 Navigation Voice Commands……411 Locking and Unlocking the Doors From Point of Interest (POI) Categories….406 Inside…………..54 Quick-touch Buttons……..410 One-Stage Unlocking………58 Setting a Destination……..405 Opening and Closing the Double Rear…
  • Page 458
    Index Phone……………387 Remote Control……….44 Making Calls…………389 Car Finder…………..45 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones….389 Integrated Key head Transmitter….44 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Programming a New Remote Control..45 Time…………..388 Replacing the Battery………45 Phone Menu Options……..390 Sounding a Panic Alarm……..46 Removing a Headlamp…….216 Phone Settings………..393 Repairing Minor Paint Damage….230 Phone Voice Commands……..394…
  • Page 459
    Index Safety Precautions………111 Starting a Diesel Engine……107 Satellite Radio……….294 Cold Weather Operation………108 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number Engine Glow Plugs……….107 (ESN)…………..295 Failure to Start…………108 Satellite Radio Reception Factors….295 Starting a Cold or Hot Engine……108 Starting a Gasoline Engine…….106 SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service….295 Troubleshooting……….296 Before starting the engine check the Scheduled Maintenance Record….441…
  • Page 460
    Switching Cruise Control On……147 Using MyKey With Remote Start Transportation Tire Quality Systems…………51 Grades……………234 Tire Pressure Monitoring System….251 Vehicles With Ford-Approved Aftermarket Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Remote Start Systems……..51 Monitoring System……..252 Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Aftermarket Remote Start Systems..51…
  • Page 461
    Index Using SYNC With Your Phone….305 Accessing Features Through the Phone Menu…………..312 Warning Lamps and Indicators….75 Accessing Your Phone Settings….316 Anti-Lock Brake System……..75 Making a Call…………310 Battery…………..75 Pairing a Cell Phone for the First Brake System…………75 Time…………..305 Diesel Warning Lamps……..75 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones….307 Direction Indicator……….76 Phone Options during an Active Call…311…

Посмотреть инструкция для Ford Transit (2015) бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории автомобили, 6 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 7.3. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: английский. У вас есть вопрос о Ford Transit (2015) или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Ford Transit (2015).

Как перевести мили в километры?

1 миля равна 1,609344 километрам, а 1 километр — 0,62137119 милям.

Где я могу узнать идентификационный номер транспортного средства Ford?

Место размещения идентификационного номера транспортного средства зависит от марки и типа транспортного средства. Номер может быть выбит на раме транспортного средства или указан на номерном знаке. Чтобы узнать место расположения идентификационного номера транспортного средства лучше всего ознакомиться с руководством по эксплуатации Ford Transit (2015).

Что такое идентификационный номер транспортного средства (VIN)?

Идентификационный номер транспортного средства — уникальный для каждого транспортного средства идентификационный номер. Аббревиатура VIN расшифровывается как «Vehicle Identification Number» (Идентификационный номер транспортного средства).

Когда транспортному средству Ford требуется техническое обслуживание?

Регулярное техническое обслуживание необходимо всем транспортным средствам. С информацией о том, как часто необходимо проходить техническое обслуживание и чему именно стоит уделять особое внимание можно ознакомиться в инструкции по техническому обслуживанию. Как правило, транспортное средство требует технического обслуживания каждые 2 года или 30 000 километров пробега.

Когда следует заменять тормозную жидкость на Ford?

Тормозную жидкость рекомендуется менять каждые два года.

В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?

В топливе E10 содержится до десяти процентов этанола, в то время как в E5 содержится менее пяти процентов. Соответственно, топливо E10 менее вредит окружающей среде.

Одна или несколько дверей не открываются изнутри. Что мне делать?

Скорее всего, замок оснащен защитой от детей и поэтому не может быть открыт изнутри. Процедура открытия замка с защитой от детей зависит от марки и типа замка.

Автомобильный радиоприемник не включается, что делать?

Если автомобильный радиоприемник не включен, на него не будет подаваться питание. Убедитесь, что красный провод подключен к контактному источнику питания, а желтый провод — к источнику питания постоянной мощности.

Инструкция Ford Transit (2015) доступно в русский?

К сожалению, у нас нет руководства для Ford Transit (2015), доступного в русский. Это руководство доступно в английский.

Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

Ford TRANSIT 2015 Owner's Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ford Manuals
  4. Automobile
  5. TRANSIT 2015
  6. Owner’s manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com

ford.ca

October 2014

Third Printing

Owner’s Manual

Transit

Litho in U.S.A.

FK3J 19A321 AB

loading

Related Manuals for Ford TRANSIT 2015

Summary of Contents for Ford TRANSIT 2015

  • Page 1
    2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual fordowner.com ford.ca October 2014 Third Printing Owner’s Manual Transit Litho in U.S.A. FK3J 19A321 AB…
  • Page 2
    No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2014 All rights reserved. Part Number: 03/2014 20140915160737…
  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    Symbols Glossary……….7 General Information on Radio Frequencies……….43 Data Recording……….9 Remote Control……….43 California Proposition 65……10 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Perchlorate…………10 Control…………45 Ford Credit…………10 Replacement Parts MyKey Recommendation……..10 Principle of Operation……..46 Special Notices……….11 Creating a MyKey……….47 Mobile Communications Clearing All MyKeys……..48 Equipment…………11…

  • Page 5
    Table of Contents Power Seats………….96 Lighting Rear Seats…………97 General Information……..65 Lighting Control……….65 Auxiliary Power Points Autolamps…………66 Auxiliary Power Points………101 Instrument Lighting Dimmer……67 Cigar Lighter………..102 Daytime Running Lamps……67 Direction Indicators……..68 Storage Compartments Interior Lamps……….68 Cup Holders…………103 Overhead Console……..103 Windows and Mirrors Bottle Holder……….103 Power Windows……….69 Exterior Mirrors……….70…
  • Page 6
    Table of Contents Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Reduced Engine Performance….172 Brakes…………136 Economical Driving……..172 Parking Brake……….137 Cold Weather Precautions……173 Driving Through Water……..173 Traction Control Floor Mats…………173 Principle of Operation………138 Using Traction Control……..138 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance……..175 Stability Control Hazard Warning Flashers……176 Principle of Operation……..140 Fuel Shutoff…………176 Using Stability Control………141…
  • Page 7
    Table of Contents Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.5L……204 Wheels and Tires Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.7L……204 General Information……..233 Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.2L Power Stroke Tire Care…………234 Diesel…………204 Using Winter Tires……..250 Engine Oil Check……….204 Using Snow Chains……..251 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Tire Pressure Monitoring System….251 Filter………….205 Changing a Road Wheel……256…
  • Page 8
    Table of Contents Audio Troubleshooting……299 SYNC General Information……..300 Using Voice Recognition……302 Using SYNC With Your Phone…304 SYNC Applications and Services..318 Using SYNC With Your Media Player…………329 SYNC Troubleshooting……339 MyFord Touch General Information……..348 Settings…………356 Entertainment……….369 Phone…………..388 Information…………395 Navigation…………405 Accessories Accessories………….414 Auxiliary Switches……..415 Appendices End User License Agreement….416 Extended Service Plan…
  • Page 9
    Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 10: Introduction

    Introduction Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an ABOUT THIS MANUAL authorized Ford dealer may have originally sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle Thank you for choosing Ford. We modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some recommend that you take some time to…

  • Page 11
    Introduction Air conditioning system Engine air filter E162384 Anti-lock braking system Engine coolant Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant temperature Battery Engine oil Battery acid Explosive gas Brake fluid — non petroleum Fan warning based Brake system Fasten safety belt Cabin air filter Front airbag Check fuel cap…
  • Page 12: Data Recording

    Introduction Jack Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control Keep out of reach of children E138639 E161353 Windshield wash and wipe Lighting control Low tire pressure warning DATA RECORDING Maintain correct fluid level A large number of electronic components of your vehicle contain data storage modules temporarily or permanently storing technical data about the condition Note operating instructions…

  • Page 13: California Proposition 65

    After an error has been (U.S. Only) corrected, these data are deleted from the error storage module or they are constantly Ford Credit offers a full range of financing overwritten. and lease plans to help you acquire your When using the vehicle, situations may vehicle.

  • Page 14: Special Notices

    Make sure you are aware of all applicable failure of non-Ford parts may not be local laws that may affect the use of covered by the Ford Warranty. For electronic devices while driving.

  • Page 15
    Introduction are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings.
  • Page 16: Child Safety

    Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS requirements of law. Ford recommends See the following sections for directions checking with a NHTSA Certified Child on how to properly use safety restraints Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and for children. consult your pediatrician to make sure your…

  • Page 17: Installing Child Seats

    Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety seat toddlers (generally age four or younger). (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat).

  • Page 18: Child Safety

    Child Safety Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the an infant carrier, convertible seat, or child seat will be installed in the upright toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or position. children weighing 40 pounds (18 •…

  • Page 19
    Child Safety E142530 E142875 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5. To put the retractor in the automatic portions together, route the tongue locking mode, grasp the shoulder through the child seat according to the portion of the belt and pull downward child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
  • Page 20
    Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is correctly installed. In Canada, check with your local St.
  • Page 21
    Child Safety E184881 E178553 Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. E178551 E177639 E178552 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 22: Using Tether Straps

    Child Safety The LATCH anchors are located at the rear Combining Safety Belt and LATCH section of the rear seat between the Lower Anchors for Attaching Child cushion and seat back above the symbols Safety Seats as shown. Follow the child seat When used in combination, either the manufacturer’s instructions to correctly safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors…

  • Page 23
    Child Safety E178553 E178551 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it.
  • Page 24
    If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends its use. Rear Seats Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat, under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts.
  • Page 25: Booster Seats

    Ford also the seat cushion? recommends its use. • Can the child sit without slouching? BOOSTER SEATS •…

  • Page 26
    Child Safety If your backless booster seat has a • High back booster seats removable shield, remove the shield. If a If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot vehicle seating position has a low seat find a seating position that adequately back or no head restraint, a backless supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat may place your child’s head…
  • Page 27: Child Seat Positioning

    Child Safety E142597 WARNINGS If the booster seat slides on the vehicle warnings provided by your vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a manufacturer. A safety seat that is rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet improperly installed or utilized, is liner under the booster seat may improve inappropriate for your child’s height, age, this condition.

  • Page 28: Child Safety Locks

    Child Safety Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Restraint Combined Use any attachment method as indicated below by X type weight of LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt child and (lower (lower and top and LATCH only child anchors…

  • Page 29: Safety Belts

    Safety Belts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly WARNINGS restrained in a rear seating position. Always drive and ride with the seat Failure to follow this could seriously backrest upright and the lap belt increase the risk of injury or death.

  • Page 30: Fastening The Safety Belts

    Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners at the front 2. To unfasten, press the release button seating positions are designed to tighten and remove the tongue from the the safety belts when activated. In frontal buckle. and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and Using Safety Belts During rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may Pregnancy…

  • Page 31: Safety Belts

    Safety Belts Safety Belt Locking Modes Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is WARNINGS automatically pre-locked. The safety belt After any vehicle crash, the safety will still retract to remove any slack in the belt system at all passenger seating shoulder belt.

  • Page 32: Safety Belt Height Adjustment

    Safety Belts How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and return the safety belt to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the…

  • Page 33: Safety Belt Minder

    Safety Belts Conditions of operation If… Then… The driver’s safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1- before the ignition switch is turned to the 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds on position… 4-8 seconds. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the The safety belt warning light and warning indicator light is illuminated and the…

  • Page 34: Child Restraint And Safety Belt Maintenance

    The driver safety belt is unbuckled. specific to the child restraint. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the Ford Motor Company recommends that engine. all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light involved in a crash be replaced.

  • Page 35: Supplementary Restraints System

    Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and WARNINGS right front passenger from certain upper Airbags do not inflate slowly or body injuries.

  • Page 36: Driver And Passenger Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System Passenger Airbag On and Off DRIVER AND PASSENGER Switch (If Equipped) AIRBAGS WARNINGS WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Never place your arm or any objects Systems, children 12 and under over an airbag module. Placing your should be properly restrained in a arm over a deploying airbag can rear seating position.

  • Page 37: Supplementary Restraints System

    Supplementary Restraints System Switch position Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag indicator OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit OFF: Unlit Enabled ON: Lit WARNINGS An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless the E170613…

  • Page 38
    Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are 12 years and under in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and child restraints correctly. Do not place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag on and off switch and the passenger airbag is turned off.
  • Page 39
    Supplementary Restraints System The passenger side airbag should always National Highway Traffic Safety be on (the pass airbag off light should not Administration Deactivation Criteria be illuminated) unless the passenger (Excluding Canada) meets the requirements stated either in WARNING Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration or Transport This vehicle has special energy Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
  • Page 40
    Supplementary Restraints System • the vehicle has no rear seat; Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only) • although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, WARNING children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must This vehicle has special energy ride in the front because no space is management safety belts for the available in the rear seat(s) of the…
  • Page 41: Children And Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System • my vehicle has no rear seat; After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very • although children age 12 and under ride important that they continue to sit in the rear seat whenever possible, properly.

  • Page 42: Side Airbags

    Supplementary Restraints System If two adults and a child occupy a Regular The side airbags are located on the Cab, properly restrain the child in the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front center front unless doing so would interfere seats.

  • Page 43: Safety Canopy

    Supplementary Restraints System The Safety Canopy will deploy during SAFETY CANOPY (If Equipped) significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected WARNINGS by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy Do not place objects or mount is mounted to the roof side rail behind the equipment on or near the headliner headliner and above each row of seats.

  • Page 44: Crash Sensors And Airbag Indicator

    Supplementary Restraints System Children 12 years old and under should The supplemental restraint system control always be properly restrained in the rear module also monitors the readiness of the seats. The safety canopy will not interfere above safety devices plus the crash with children restrained using a properly sensors.

  • Page 45: Airbag Disposal

    Supplementary Restraints System • The design of the front airbags is to deploy only in frontal and near-frontal crashes, for example not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, unless the crash causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. • The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to deploy only in frontal and near-frontal crashes, and may also deploy if a safety canopy…

  • Page 46: Keys And Remote Controls

    Keys and Remote Controls • structures around the vehicle PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • other vehicles parked next to your The remote control allows you to: vehicle • remotely lock or unlock the vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote doors control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions, for example…

  • Page 47: Programming A New Remote Control

    Keys and Remote Controls Integrated Key head Transmitter E138615 E138619 Note: Your vehicle s keys came with a security label that provides important Twist a thin coin in the slot of the vehicle key cut information. Keep the label transmitter near the key ring to remove in a safe place for future reference.

  • Page 48: Replacing A Lost Key Or Remote Control

    Keys and Remote Controls Note: If locking was not successful or if any door is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will not flash. Sounding a Panic Alarm Note: The alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.

  • Page 49: Mykey

    MyKey (If Equipped) Configurable Settings PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION With an admin key, you can configure MyKey allows you to program keys with certain MyKey settings when you first restricted driving modes to promote good create a MyKey and before you recycle the driving habits.

  • Page 50: Creating A Mykey

    MyKey (If Equipped) wheel. See Information Displays (page CREATING A MYKEY 78). You can program a MyKey using the Insert the key you want to program into the information display control on the steering ignition and switch the ignition on. Press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description…

  • Page 51: Clearing All Mykeys

    MyKey (If Equipped) control on the steering wheel. See CLEARING ALL MYKEYS Information Displays (page 78). You can clear or change your MyKey Switch the ignition on using an admin key settings using the information display or fob. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description…

  • Page 52: Checking Mykey System Status

    MyKey (If Equipped) You can find information on programmed CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM MyKey(s) using the information display STATUS control on the steering wheel. See Information Displays (page 78). To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Description…

  • Page 53: Using Mykey With Remote Start Systems

    Ford-approved remote start gear. This is intentional. When you restart system. your vehicle, it reads the Key or intelligent…

  • Page 54: Mykey Troubleshooting

    2. Start your vehicle using your program the remote start system as a non-Ford-approved remote start fob. MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote 3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48). start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver Follow Steps 1-3.

  • Page 55
    MyKey (If Equipped) Condition Potential Causes · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 50). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
  • Page 56: Locks

    Locks Reprogramming the Unlocking LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Function Note: Make sure you have locked your You can reprogram the unlocking function vehicle before leaving it unattended. so that only the driver door unlocks. See Remote Control (page 43). Note: Do not leave the keys in your vehicle. Locking and Unlocking Locking Confirmation…

  • Page 57: Opening And Closing The Sliding Door

    Locks Opening and Closing the Sliding Door Opening the Sliding Door E172313 Pull the door handle to release the door check feature. 2. Slide the door to close. Opening and Closing the Double E148804 Rear Doors Pull the interior door handle to open the door.

  • Page 58
    Locks Unlocking and Opening the Double Rear Doors From Inside E148806 E175828 Lift the locking button up. E178366 E175955 Slide the lever to release the catch. 2. Push the inner release lever down to 2. Fully open the cargo door. open the door.
  • Page 59: Rear Emergency Exit

    Locks E179501 E148806 Pull the interior handle up to open the door Rear Emergency Exit in an emergency. Wagon and Bus Automatic Locking You can set your vehicle’s doors to lock automatically when you exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). You can switch this on in the information display.

  • Page 60: Configurable Unlocking

    Locks Configurable Unlocking Note: When you unlock the doors, the direction indicators flash once. Configurable unlocking is set when you You unlock all of the doors when you: purchase your vehicle. It allows you to select which doors unlock when you press, •…

  • Page 61: Security

    (If Equipped) coded key disarms the engine immobilization system. Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Replacement Keys Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security The integrated keyhead transmitter protection.

  • Page 62: Anti-Theft Alarm

    Security 2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep ANTI-THEFT ALARM the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Alarm System 3. Switch the ignition off and remove the The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against first correctly coded key from the unauthorized access to your vehicle ignition.

  • Page 63: Steering Wheel

    Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 93). E95179 3. Lock the steering column. AUDIO CONTROL — VEHICLES WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY…

  • Page 64: Audio Control — Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display

    Steering Wheel Seek, Next or Previous VOICE CONTROL — VEHICLES WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN Press the seek button to: DISPLAY • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: •…

  • Page 65: Cruise Control

    Steering Wheel MyFord Touch® Controls INFORMATION DISPLAY (If Equipped) CONTROL Your steering wheel controls may also have these additional features. Press to go to the home screen. E142613 Press to go to the information screen. E142608 See MyFord Touch (page 348). CRUISE CONTROL E130248 See Information Displays (page 78).

  • Page 66: Wipers And Washers

    Wipers and Washers Intermittent Wipe WINDSHIELD WIPERS Defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Do not operate the windshield wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to overheat. Always use the windshield washers before you switch the windshield wipers on.

  • Page 67: Windshield Washers

    Wipers and Washers Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades.

  • Page 68: Lighting

    Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Lighting Control Positions Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold.

  • Page 69: Autolamps

    Lighting Headlamp Flasher When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations or when the wipers activate. If equipped, the following also activate when the lighting control is in the autolamps position and you switch them on in the information display: •…

  • Page 70: Instrument Lighting Dimmer

    Lighting Type 1 — Conventional (Non- INSTRUMENT LIGHTING Configurable) DIMMER The daytime running lamps turn on when: The ignition is switched to the on position. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or the parking brake is released for vehicles with manual transmissions.

  • Page 71: Direction Indicators

    Lighting If you set the switch to position B, the DIRECTION INDICATORS courtesy lamps will automatically turn on when you unlock your vehicle or open a door. If you leave a door open with the ignition switched off, they will automatically turn off after a short period of time to prevent the vehicle battery from losing charge.

  • Page 72: Windows And Mirrors

    Windows and Mirrors Driver Side One-Touch Up POWER WINDOWS Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or WARNINGS lift it again to stop the window. To avoid risk of injury, do not leave Bounce-Back children or pets unattended in your vehicle.

  • Page 73: Exterior Mirrors

    Windows and Mirrors 4. Release the switch. 5. Lift the switch again for one more second. 6. Open the window and then try to close using the one-touch feature. Repeat the procedure if the window does not close using the one-touch feature.

  • Page 74: Rear Quarter Windows

    Windows and Mirrors The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. REAR QUARTER WINDOWS Opening the Rear Windows Equipped)

  • Page 75: Instrument Cluster

    Instrument Cluster GAUGES E184961 Information display. See Information Displays (page 78). Speedometer. Engine coolant temperature gauge. Tripmeter reset and distance to empty toggle button. Fuel gauge. Tachometer. Vehicle Settings and Personalization Information Display See General Information (page 78). Odometer Engine Coolant Temperature Registers the distance your vehicle has Gauge traveled.

  • Page 76: Tripmeter Reset And Distance To

    Instrument Cluster If the needle enters the red section, the The needle should move toward F when engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points soon as it is safe to do so and switch the to E after adding fuel, this indicates your engine off.

  • Page 77: Warning Lamps And Indicators

    Instrument Cluster If it illuminates when your vehicle is WARNING LAMPS AND moving, make sure the parking brake is INDICATORS disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid The following warning lamps and level or a brake system fault. Have the indicators will alert you to a vehicle system checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 78: Direction Indicator

    Instrument Cluster All Vehicles Water In Fuel If either lamp illuminates when the engine It will illuminate if there is excess is running, this indicates a malfunction. The water in the fuel filter. Drain off engine will continue to run but it may have the water immediately.

  • Page 79: Audible Warnings And Indicators

    Instrument Cluster Park Lamp It will illuminate when the system is not available and may indicate a system It will illuminate when you switch malfunction. Have your vehicle checked the headlamp low beam or the by an authorized dealer. side and tail lamps on. Low Fuel Level Safety Belt Minder If it illuminates when you are…

  • Page 80: Instrument Cluster

    Instrument Cluster Door Ajar Sounds when a door is not fully closed and your vehicle is moving. Exterior Lamps On Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver door, and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps Gearshift Lever not in Park (P) Sounds when the driver door is open, the key is in the ignition and the gearshift lever…

  • Page 81: Information Displays

    Information Displays Information Display Controls GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road.

  • Page 82
    Information Displays Message Average Fuel All values See Trip Computer (page 81). See Gauges (page 72). Information Message Driver Alert DEF level Engine Hours Idle: Engine Hours Running: Trailer Brake Gain: System check Settings Message Action Driver Assist Driver Alert Trailer Brake Electric E.-Hydraulic…
  • Page 83
    Information Displays Message Action Distance Choose your applicable setting Temp unit Choose your applicable setting Convenience Compass Show — check enabled or uncheck disabled Locks Autolock Autounlock Global Unlock System Reset Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default Menu Structure — Information and System Check Entertainment Display All active warnings will display first if…
  • Page 84: Trip Computer

    Information Displays Message BT Devices Phone settings Set as master Phonebook pref. Set ringtone Phone status Text msg notify Emerg. Assist. SYNC-Menu Message SYNC-Settings Bluetooth on Set defaults Master reset System info Voice settings Browse USB SYNC-Apps Average Fuel Consumption TRIP COMPUTER Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.

  • Page 85: Personalized Settings

    Information Displays Trip Odometer PERSONALIZED SETTINGS Registers the distance traveled of Measure Units individual journeys. You can choose personalized settings Trip Timer using the information display control on the steering wheel. See Information Registers the elapsed time of individual Displays (page 78). journeys or the total time since the function was last reset.

  • Page 86: Information Messages

    Information Displays You need to confirm certain messages INFORMATION MESSAGES before you can access the menus. The information display will automatically remove other messages after a short period of time. Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all of the messages will display or be available.

  • Page 87
    Information Displays Diesel Exhaust Fluid Message Description and Action DEF level low Range XXX Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the mi Refill now diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible. DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the max in XXX mi…
  • Page 88
    Information Displays Door Open Message Description and Action Driver door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the door. Driver side rear door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the door.
  • Page 89
    Information Displays Maintenance Message Description and Action Oil change required The engine oil has exceeded the service time or distance limit. Renew the engine oil and oil filter as soon as possible. See Engine Oil Check (page 204). Brake fluid level low The system has detected a fault that requires service.
  • Page 90
    Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Description and Action Low Tire Pressure The tire pressure is low in one or more tires, check the tire pressures. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 251). Tire Pressure Monitor The system has detected a fault that requires service. Fault Tire Pressure Sensor The system has detected a fault that requires service or the…
  • Page 91: Climate Control

    Climate Control Air Conditioning PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The system directs air through the Outside Air evaporator for cooling. The evaporator extracts humidity from the air to help keep Keep the air intakes in front of the the windows free of mist. The system windshield free from obstruction (such as directs the resulting condensation to the snow or leaves) to allow the climate…

  • Page 92: Manual Climate Control

    Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL E147011 Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.

  • Page 93: Hints On Controlling The Interior Climate

    Climate Control Recommended Settings for Select to distribute air through Heating the windshield air vents. You can also use this setting to defog or • Adjust the fan speed to the second clear the windshield of a thin covering of speed setting.

  • Page 94: Rear Passenger Climate Controls

    Climate Control Side Window Defogging in Cold Maximum Cooling Performance in Weather Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel and Footwell Positions • Adjust the air distribution control to the instrument panel and windshield air • Adjust the temperature control to the vents positions.

  • Page 95: Heated Windows And Mirrors

    Climate Control Note: Switch the air conditioning on to cool Note: Do not clean the mirror glass or mirror the air through the rear air vents. assembly with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. HEATED WINDOWS AND Note: On vehicles without a heated exterior mirror switch, they will turn on automatically MIRRORS when you switch the heated rear window…

  • Page 96: Seats

    Seats • Adjust the head restraint so that the SITTING IN THE CORRECT top of it is level with the top of your POSITION head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain WARNINGS comfortable. Do not recline the seat backrest too •…

  • Page 97: Manual Seats

    Seats Removing the Head Restraint The head restraint consists of: WARNING Do not remove the head restraint from an occupied seat. Lift the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3.

  • Page 98: Adjusting The Lumbar Support

    Seats Adjusting the Lumbar Support WARNINGS Make sure the driver seat fully locks into place by rocking it backward and forward. E146386 Rotate the handle clockwise or counter clockwise to attain the desired lumbar support. E177638 Recline Adjustment Lift the handle. 2.

  • Page 99: Power Seats

    Seats Adjusting the Armrest E95256 Raise the armrest fully. 2. Lower the armrest to the stowed position. E175474 3. Raise the armrest to attain the desired Lift the handle. position. 2. Move the seat back backward or forward to attain the desired position. POWER SEATS (If Equipped) 3.

  • Page 100: Rear Seats

    Seats E138647 Power Lumbar REAR SEATS WARNINGS Do not use the bench seats as a bed when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Do not place objects on a folded seat.

  • Page 101
    Seats Recline Adjustment Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger Vehicles WARNINGS WARNINGS When reclining the seat backrest forward and backward, take care not Seats can weigh up to 132 lb (60 kg). to get your hands caught between Do not attempt to lift or carry a seat the seat backrest and the frame, catches on your own.
  • Page 102: Installing The Seats

    Seats 3. Pull the seat backward to release the seat frame front catches. 4. Remove the seat. Note: Two persons must carry out this procedure. Note: You can only remove seats that have integral release handles. Note: The seat back does not fold forward. Installing the Seats WARNINGS Make sure that the floor catches are…

  • Page 103
    Seats Align the seat frame front catches. 2. Push the seat forward to engage the seat frame front catches. 3. Align the seat frame rear catches. 4. Allow the seat to drop under its own weight for the last 6-8 in (15-20 cm). Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 104: Auxiliary Power Points

    Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Point Locations WARNINGS Do not use the power points for operating a cigar lighter element. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power points. Run the engine for full capacity use of the power points.

  • Page 105: Cigar Lighter

    Auxiliary Power Points • Compressor-driven refrigerators. • Medical or measuring equipment that must process precise data. • Appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply, for example: • Microcomputer-controlled electric blankets. • Touch-sensor lamps. CIGAR LIGHTER (If Equipped) E143941 Use the AC power point for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts.

  • Page 106: Storage Compartments

    Storage Compartments CUP HOLDERS WARNINGS Do not place hot drinks in the cup holders when your vehicle is moving. Make sure that cups placed in the holders do not obstruct your vision while driving. OVERHEAD CONSOLE Overhead Storage Compartments Overhead Console E171160 WARNING Do not place heavy objects in the…

  • Page 107: Starting And Stopping The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground E72128 cover.

  • Page 108: Starting A Diesel Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine Flooded Engine When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm up the Move the transmission selector lever engine. If the engine idle speed does not to position P. slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 109: Diesel Particulate Filter

    Starting and Stopping the Engine and the environmental temperature sensor 4. Release the key. will determine how long the glow plugs Note: You may need to crank the engine for stay energized. The required time for the up to 10 seconds when the outside air glow plugs to remain energized will temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below.

  • Page 110: Switching Off The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine Regeneration You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the WARNING regeneration process: • Drive your vehicle in more favorable Do not park or idle your vehicle over conditions, which you will find at higher dry leaves, dry grass or other vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a combustible materials.

  • Page 111: Starting And Stopping The Engine

    Starting and Stopping the Engine • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a WARNINGS clean area, clear of combustibles. Do not use your heater with • Make sure the heater, heater cord and ungrounded electrical systems or extension cord are firmly connected. two-pronged adapters.

  • Page 112: Fuel And Refueling

    Fuel and Refueling • Automotive fuels can be harmful or SAFETY PRECAUTIONS fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if WARNINGS swallowed can cause death or Do not overfill the fuel tank. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately, even if no cause leakage and lead to fuel spray…

  • Page 113: Fuel Quality — Gasoline

    Fuel and Refueling • Fuels containing metallic based FUEL QUALITY — GASOLINE additives, including manganese-based compounds. Note: Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause powertrain • Fuels containing the octane booster damage, impair the emission control system additive, methylcyclopentadienyl or cause loss of vehicle performance.

  • Page 114: Fuel Quality — Diesel

    Do not mix diesel with oil, kerosene, Ford Motor Company dealer service parts. paraffin, gasoline or other liquids to Failure to use retrofit components other diesel. This can cause damage to the than those available through your fuel system.

  • Page 115: Fuel And Refueling

    To help achieve acceptable engine markets will need to be retrofitted (at the performance and durability when using customer’s expense using Ford authorized biodiesel in your vehicle: dealer service parts) in order to be reliably •…

  • Page 116: Diesel Fuel Additives

    Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Ford specifications in your fuel. Container WARNINGS FUEL FILLER FUNNEL Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel…

  • Page 117: Catalytic Converter

    Fuel and Refueling 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel WARNINGS container. Do not try to pry open or push open 4. Remove the plastic funnel from the the capless fuel system with foreign fuel tank filler pipe opening. objects.

  • Page 118: Selective Catalytic Reduction System

    Fuel and Refueling Continued driving without refilling the fluid SELECTIVE CATALYTIC will result in: REDUCTION SYSTEM • Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to this occurring a message will appear in WARNINGS the information display. You must refill the diesel exhaust •…

  • Page 119: Filling Exhaust Fluid Tank Using Container

    Fuel and Refueling Note: Immediately wash off any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled on to a painted surface with soapy water. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Fuel Station Pump Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using a pump is similar to a refuelling your vehicle.

  • Page 120: Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines

    Fuel and Refueling 6. Remove the spout from the diesel Note: If the vehicle speed becomes limited exhaust fluid container and replace the or the engine will only run at idle speed, cap. normal vehicle operation will not resume until you have the system repaired. To Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in service a contaminated or inoperative the container retain it for later use.

  • Page 121: Refueling

    Fuel and Refueling Driving conditions Approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage per tank mi (km) Primary trailer tow, aggressive driving 1100–4100 (1,770–6,600) City drive 4100–6500 (6,600–10,460) Steady highway drive 6500–10500 (10,460–16,900) Do not attempt to start the engine if you have refueled the fuel tank with the REFUELING incorrect fuel.

  • Page 122
    Fuel and Refueling E139202 Note: When you insert the correct size fuel E162792 pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will 5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within open. This helps to avoid refueling with the the area shown. incorrect fuel. 3.
  • Page 123: Fuel Consumption

    Fuel and Refueling Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System 4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle, allow WARNING about five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel The fuel system may be under filler nozzle.

  • Page 124: Filling The Tank

    Fuel and Refueling • The usable capacity of the fuel tank is 3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the the amount of fuel that can be added fuel tank and record the current into the tank after the gauge indicates odometer reading.

  • Page 125: Emission Control System

    Fuel and Refueling • Transmissions give their best fuel If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft economy when operated in the top or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance cruise gear and with steady pressure replacements, or for service of on the gas pedal.

  • Page 126
    Fuel and Refueling Readiness for When the service engine soon Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a Testing malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may Some state/provincial and local cause the service engine soon indicator to governments may have illuminate. Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment Examples of temporary malfunctions are:…
  • Page 127: Active Regeneration

    Then complete the above driving cycle. the diesel particulate filter requiring The engine must warm up to its normal replacement that the Ford Warranty may operating temperature. Do not switch the not cover. If your vehicle is not fitted with…

  • Page 128: System Messages

    Drive in a manner to clean the diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system mainten- ance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these messages.

  • Page 129
    You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to Drive to clean continue to function correctly. Do not disregard a system maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding this message.
  • Page 130
    Fuel and Refueling Using the Information Display You cannot use the operator commanded regeneration if the You can start operator commanded service engine soon light is regeneration using the information display. illuminated. See General Information (page 78). To start operator commanded regeneration, run the engine at normal operating temperature and scroll to: Message Action and Description…
  • Page 131
    Fuel and Refueling Once operator commanded regeneration regeneration is complete. Do not reposition starts, engine rpm will rise to the vehicle over materials that could burn approximately 2,000 — 2,500 rpm and the until the exhaust system has had sufficient cooling fan will increase speed;…
  • Page 132
    Fuel and Refueling Message Action and Description Exhaust Filter Full Clean The diesel particulate filter is full and you should switch the Soon automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible. Exhaust Filter Over- The diesel particulate filter is overloaded you must switch loaded Clean Now the automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible.
  • Page 133
    Similar federal or provincial laws may exhaust system or engine. These actions apply in Canada. Ford recommends may also affect your vehicle s warranty. See against any vehicle modification without the Warranty Guide for more information.
  • Page 134
    Fuel and Refueling Tampering With a Noise Control • An open or pinched sensor hose. System • Incorrect engine oil level. • Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. Federal law prohibits the following acts: • Incorrect engine oil viscosity for • The removal or rendering inoperative climactic conditions.
  • Page 135: Transmission

    Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Manual upshift Manual downshift WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully Tow/Haul (T/H) (If Equipped) and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition Tow/Haul delays transmission upshift to off and remove the key whenever you leave reduce the frequency of transmission your vehicle.

  • Page 136
    Transmission The transmission shifts to the appropriate WARNINGS gear for optimum performance based on Apply the parking brake, shift the ambient temperature, road gradient, gearshift lever to park (P) and switch vehicle load and your input. the ignition off before leaving your vehicle.
  • Page 137: Brake-Shift Interlock

    Transmission If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Upshifts when accelerating (recom- Snow mended for best fuel economy) If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, shift Upshift from: Vehicle speed mph between drive (D) and reverse (R) pressing ( km/h): lightly on the accelerator pedal in each gear.

  • Page 138
    Transmission E182198 2. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the E174827 housing cover. 4. Move the white lever toward the rear of your vehicle. 5. Shift the gearshift lever out of park (P) and into neutral (N). 6.
  • Page 139: Brakes

    Brakes Anti-lock Brake System GENERAL INFORMATION This system helps you maintain steering Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If control during emergency stops by keeping a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or the brakes from locking. continuous squeal sound is present, the This lamp momentarily brake linings may be worn-out.

  • Page 140: Parking Brake

    Brakes Note: Do not press the release button while PARKING BRAKE pulling the parking brake lever up. Center Parking Brake E172225 To apply the parking brake: Press the foot brake pedal firmly. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its fullest extent.

  • Page 141: Traction Control

    Traction Control Note: A MyKey can be set up to prevent the PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION MyKey user from switching the traction control system off. See MyKey (page The traction control system helps avoid 46). drive wheel spin and loss of traction. If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power…

  • Page 142
    Traction Control WARNING If a malfunction occurs within the AdvanceTrac system, the traction control off lamp will illuminate. Make sure the traction control system was not manually switched off using the traction control button. If the traction control lamp stays on, have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately.
  • Page 143: Stability Control

    Stability Control The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. WARNINGS The electronic stability control portion of Vehicle modifications involving the system helps avoid skids and lateral braking system, aftermarket roof slides and roll stability control helps avoid racks, suspension, steering system,…

  • Page 144: Using Stability Control

    Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control (RSC®) The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off, but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R.

  • Page 145: Parking Aids

    As you continue the inner your responsibility to drive with due sensors will detect objects directly behind care and attention. your vehicle. If your vehicles has a non-Ford approved trailer tow module the PARKING AID system may not correctly detect objects.

  • Page 146: Rear View Camera

    Parking Aids (If Equipped) The system detects objects when you shift into reverse (R) and: • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is stationary but an object is approaching your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

  • Page 147: Parking Aids

    Parking Aids (If Equipped) Using the Display WARNINGS The operation of the camera may WARNING vary depending on the ambient temperature, vehicle and road Objects above the camera may not conditions. be visible. Check the area behind your vehicle when necessary. Do not place objects in front of the camera.

  • Page 148: Switching The Rear View Camera Off

    Parking Aids (If Equipped) Green — 24 inches to 35 inches (0.6 meter to 0.9 meter). Black — center line of the projected vehicle path. Note: The green line is extended from 35 in (0.9 m) up to a distance of 126 in (3.2 m). Note: When reversing with a trailer the camera will show the direction of your vehicle and not the direction of the trailer.

  • Page 149: Cruise Control

    Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Cruise control allows you to control your speed using the switches on the steering wheel. You can use cruise control when you exceed approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

  • Page 150: Switching Cruise Control Off

    Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pull RES toward you and release. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off. Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…

  • Page 151: Driving Aids

    Driving Aids SPEED LIMITER WARNINGS The system may not operate in areas Engine Speed Limiter during roadwork construction. Engine speed is limited to protect the The system may not operate on engine. roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes. Vehicle Speed Limiter — Fixed Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding The system prevents you from driving…

  • Page 152: Lane Keeping System

    Driving Aids System Warnings Alertness level is critical, indicating that you should take a rest as soon as it is safe Note: The system will not issue warnings to do so. below approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). The status bar will travel from left to right The warning system has two stages: as the calculated alertness level A temporary warning is issued to advise…

  • Page 153: Driving Aids

    Driving Aids The system will automatically detect and WARNINGS track the lane markings on the road. If your The sensor may incorrectly track lane vehicle unintentionally drifts toward the markings such as other structures or road lane markings, you will see a warning objects.

  • Page 154
    Driving Aids Setting the System Sensitivity • If you apply direct steering, accelerate fast or brake hard. You can adjust how quickly the system • Your vehicle speed is outside the warns you of a dangerous situation. The operating limits. system has two sensitivity levels which you can set using the information display.
  • Page 155: Load Carrying

    Load Carrying LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES LOAD LIMIT Securing Cargo Vehicle Loading — with and without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer or both, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.

  • Page 156
    Load Carrying Payload — is the combined weight authorized-dealer installed of cargo and passengers that the equipment on the vehicle, you vehicle is carrying. The maximum must subtract the weight of the payload for your vehicle can be equipment from the payload listed found on the Tire Label on the on the Tire Label in order to B-Pillar or the edge of the driver…
  • Page 157
    Load Carrying E142517 CARGO E143817 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Cargo Weight — includes all Rating) — is the maximum weight added to the Base Curb allowable weight that can be Weight, including cargo and carried by a single axle (front or optional equipment.
  • Page 158
    Load Carrying Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. E143818 Safety Compliance Certification GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) — Label. The label shall be affixed is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus to either the door hinge pillar, cargo, plus passengers.
  • Page 159
    Load Carrying E142524 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. E143819 GCWR (Gross Combined GCW (Gross Combined Weight) Weight Rating) — is the maximum — is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus…
  • Page 160
    Load Carrying for operation at Gross Vehicle Examples: For a 5000 pound Weight Rating, not at Gross (2268 kilogram) conventional Combined Weight Rating.) trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and Separate functional brakes should 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue be used for safe control of towed load range of 500 to 750 pounds vehicles and for trailers where the (227 to 340 kilograms).
  • Page 161
    Load Carrying 2. Determine the combined *Suppose your vehicle has a weight of the driver and 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo passengers that will be riding and luggage capacity. You decide in your vehicle. to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your 3.
  • Page 162
    Load Carrying be: 635 kilograms — (2 x 99 Special Loading Instructions kilograms) — (12 x 45 kilograms) = for Owners of Pick-up Trucks 635 — 198 — 540 = -103 kilograms. and Utility-type Vehicles You will need to reduce the load WARNING weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms).
  • Page 163: Towing

    Towing Load Placement TOWING A TRAILER To help minimize how trailer WARNINGS movement affects your vehicle Do not exceed the Gross when driving: Vehicle Weight Rating or the • Load the heaviest items closest Gross Axle Weight Rating to the trailer floor. specified on the certification label.

  • Page 164: Trailer Sway Control

    Towing TRAILER SWAY CONTROL RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Equipped) Note: Make sure to take into WARNING consideration trailer frontal area. Switching off trailer sway control Vehicles equipped with the Trailer increases the risk of loss of vehicle Tow Package or the Heavy Duty control, serious injury or death.

  • Page 165
    Towing Van and Chassis Cab Powertrain Axle Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded Ratio Trailer Weight 3.2L Power 3.31 10600 lb (4808 kg) 4750 lb (2155 kg) Stroke Diesel 3.2L Power 3.73 13500 lb (6123 kg) 7500 lb (3402 kg) Stroke Diesel 3.5L V6 GTDI 3.31 11200 lb (5080 kg)
  • Page 166: Essential Towing Checks

    Towing Calculating the Maximum ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle 1. Start with the gross combined has covered at least 1000 mi weight rating for your vehicle (1,600 km).

  • Page 167: Tow Hitch

    10% and 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. WARNING Weight Distributing Hitches The Ford trailer brake controller has been verified to be compatible with A weight distribution hitch is not trailers having electric-actuated recommended for use with your vehicle.

  • Page 168
    Towing Press the + and — buttons to adjust the brake controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase the gain setting to 10 (maximum trailer braking) or decrease it to zero (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises or lowers the setting continuously.
  • Page 169
    Towing The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph and the trailer connectivity status in the information display as follows: Message Action and Description Trailer Brake Displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain setting. This also displays if you Gain: use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with no trailer connected.
  • Page 170
    Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, the Ford Warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
  • Page 171: Before Towing A Trailer

    The trailer brake controller is only a gearshift in position park (P) to aid factory-installed or dealer-installed engine and transmission cooling and item. Ford is not responsible for to help A/C performance. warranty or performance of the controller due to misuse or customer •…

  • Page 172: Transporting The Vehicle

    Towing • If your vehicle is fitted with Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer AdvanceTrac with roll stability control after the trailer is removed from the water. (RSC), this system may turn on during Exceeding these limits may allow water to typical cornering maneuvers with a enter vehicle components: heavily loaded trailer.

  • Page 173: Towing The Vehicle On Four Wheels

    Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford flat-towed with all wheels on the ground Motor Company has not approved a under the following conditions: slingbelt towing procedure.

  • Page 174
    Towing Your vehicle cannot be flat-towed with all wheels on the ground beyond the limits set out above as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. See Emergency Towing. You must place your vehicle on a car-hauling trailer, or place the front wheels of your vehicle on a tow dolly.
  • Page 175: Driving Hints

    Driving Hints 5. Have your vehicle checked by an BREAKING-IN authorized dealer as soon as possible. You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles (480 ECONOMICAL DRIVING kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving Fuel economy is affected by several things characteristics.

  • Page 176: Cold Weather Precautions

    Driving Hints • Reduce the use of air conditioning and heat. • Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain. • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Avoid carrying unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400 lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).

  • Page 177: Driving Hints

    Driving Hints WARNINGS Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position.

  • Page 178: Roadside Emergencies

    • Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, Canadian customers who require roadside local or municipal law, shall tow Ford assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using…

  • Page 179: Hazard Warning Flashers

    For before you authorize or pay for the service. vehicles equipped with a key system: Switch off the ignition. Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at 1-800-665-2006 for additional 2. Switch on the ignition. information.

  • Page 180: Jump Starting The Vehicle

    Roadside Emergencies Note: In the event that your vehicle does The positive (+) access terminal is next to not restart after your third attempt, contact the fuse box, under a red cap. To access an authorized dealer. the positive (+) terminal, lift the red cap JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS The gases around the battery can…

  • Page 181: Roadside Emergencies

    Roadside Emergencies Connecting the Jumper Cables 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting WARNING battery. 4. Make the final connection of the Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, negative (-) cable to the grounding engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components connection point of the vehicle with…

  • Page 182: Post-Crash Alert System

    Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. The horn and lamps will turn off when: •…

  • Page 183: Customer Assistance

    A reasonable time must be allowed to Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 perform a repair after taking your vehicle Telephone to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) remanufactured or other parts that are Online authorized by Ford.

  • Page 184: In California (U.s. Only)

    2. Four or more repair attempts are made Ford in writing before pursuing remedies on the same nonconformity (a defect under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is or condition that substantially impairs also allowed a final repair attempt in some the use, value or safety of the vehicle) states.

  • Page 185: The Better Business Bureau (Bbb) Auto Line Program (U.s. Only)

    BBB. Canadian dealers. In those cases where You are not bound by the decision, and you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford may reject the decision and proceed to of Canada and the authorized dealer to…

  • Page 186: Getting Assistance Outside The U.s. And Canada

    CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, FORD MOTOR COMPANY and final as the arbitrator’s award is Customer Relationship Center binding on both you and Ford of Canada. 1555 Fairlane Drive CAMVAP services are available in all Fairlane Business Park #3 Canadian territories and provinces.

  • Page 187: Ordering Additional Owner’s Literature

    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export (U.S. ONLY) Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com. If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer.

  • Page 188: Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)

    Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA, you may call You can also obtain other the Vehicle Safety Hotline information about motor vehicle toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: safety from 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov. http://www.safercar.gov; or write REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator (CANADA ONLY) 1200 New Jersey Avenue, If you believe that your vehicle has Southeast…

  • Page 189: Fuses

    Fuses This is located behind the removable trim FUSE BOX LOCATIONS panel. Engine Compartment Fuse Box Pre-fuse Box This is located under the driver’s seat. Body Control Module Fuse Box E146726 For item location: See Under Hood Overview (page 201). E152512 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box This is located behind the removable trim…

  • Page 190: Fuse Specification Chart

    Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Engine Compartment Fuse Box E148826 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Selective Catalytic Reduction — Diesel. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…

  • Page 191
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Diesel particulate filter vaporizer. Glow plug monitor. Anti-lock brake system. Stability assist. Ignition. 7.5A Powertrain control module. Cooling fan — Gasoline. Left-hand windshield wiper. Right-hand windshield wiper. Air conditioning clutch. Diesel particulate filter vaporizer glow plug. Not used.
  • Page 192
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE. Not used. 7.5A Crankcase sensor — Diesel. Injection power — Gasoline 3.7L. Ignition feed — Audio — Gasoline. 7.5A Crank case ventilation heater – Diesel. Single cooling fan. Twin cooling fan. Twin cooling fan 2 — Gasoline.
  • Page 193
    Fuses Relay Circuits switched Ignition 3. Not used. Not used. Not used. Cooling fan — Gasoline. Windshield wiper — on and off. Windshield wiper — low and high speed. Electrical Vacuum Pump — Gasoline. Starter motor. Air conditioning clutch. Fuel vaporizer system glow plug. Fuel injection pump.
  • Page 194: Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

    Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel E148827 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Airbag module. Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability control. Parking brake. Not used. Trailer tow back-up lamp relay. Cutaway body connectors. Not used. Not used. AC power outlet socket. Trailer brake module.

  • Page 195
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability control valves. Powertrain control module B+ relay. Powertrain control module power relay. Body control module power feed. Ignition relay 3. Modified vehicle connections. Not used. Heated exterior mirror relay. Modified vehicle ignition connections.
  • Page 196
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Blower motor. Horn relay. Windshield wiper relay. Remote keyless entry. Battery. 7.5A Power windows. Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning. Front blower motor. Rear blower motor. Heated rear window. Trailer socket. Auxiliary power points. Trailer connectors B+ supply.
  • Page 197
    Fuses Relay Circuits switched Horn. Trailer tow back-up lamp. Front blower motor. Rear blower motor. Heated rear window. Heated exterior mirrors. Not used. Modified vehicle connections. Pre-fuse Box E191034 Fusible link Fusible link Circuits protected rating Engine compartment fuse box. 470A Starter motor.
  • Page 198
    Fuses Fusible link Fusible link Circuits protected rating Body control module fuse box. Powertrain control module. Anti-lock brake system. 200A Passenger compartment fuse panel. 100A Passenger compartment fuse panel. Positive temperature coefficient heater. Not used. 100A Engine junction box feed. 100A Passenger compartment fuse panel.
  • Page 199
    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Not used. Not used. Switch power. Relay Circuits switched Upfitter 1. Upfitter 2. Upfitter 3. Upfitter 4. Not used. Not used. Not used. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 200: Body Control Module

    Fuses Body Control Module E148830 Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Central locking system 2. Central locking system 1. Ignition switch. Parking assist control module. Brake transmission shift interlock. Rain sensor module. Windshield washer pump. Not used. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…

  • Page 201: Changing A Fuse

    Fuses Fuse Fuse rating Circuits protected Not used. Right-hand high beam. Left-hand high beam. Right-hand exterior lamps. Left-hand position lamps. Not used. On-board diagnostic. Battery saver. Turn signal indicator. Power windows delayed accessory. Lane departure sensor heated windshield pad. Left-hand exterior lamps. Right-hand position lamps.

  • Page 202
    Fuses E142430 If electrical components in your vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. A break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 203: Maintenance

    Maintenance Working with the Engine Off GENERAL INFORMATION Set the parking brake and shift to park Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help (P). maintain its roadworthiness and resale 2. Switch off the engine. value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help 3.

  • Page 204: Under Hood Overview — 3.5L

    Maintenance E135852 E87786 3. Move the catch to the left to release 4. Open the hood and support it with the the hood. hood strut. Closing the Hood Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly in the clip. 2.

  • Page 205: Under Hood Overview — 3.7L

    Maintenance Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 223). Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204). Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake Fluid Check (page 210). Engine coolant reservoir . See Engine Coolant Check (page 206). Engine compartment fuse box.

  • Page 206: Under Hood Overview — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Maintenance Power steering fluid reservoir . See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210). Washer fluid reservoir . See Washer Fluid Check (page 210). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL E174603 Air cleaner.

  • Page 207: Engine Oil Dipstick — 3.5L

    Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.5L ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL E71362 E174604 Minimum Minimum Maximum Maximum ENGINE OIL CHECK ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK — 3.7L Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Switch off the engine and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

  • Page 208: Changing The Engine Oil And Oil Filter

    3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug. Remove the engine oil filler cap. 4. Refill the engine with new oil that 2. Add engine oil that meets Ford meets Ford specifications. See specifications. See Capacities and Capacities and Specifications (page Specifications (page 265).

  • Page 209: Oil Change Indicator Reset

    Maintenance • Sustained high-speed driving at Gross ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum loaded weight for vehicle operation). Checking the Engine Coolant • Sustained use of diesel fuel other than When the engine is cold, check the ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD). concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the OIL CHANGE INDICATOR…

  • Page 210: Recycled Engine Coolant

    Do not add coolant further than the warranty. Use prediluted engine MAX mark. coolant meeting the Ford specification. See Capacities and Specifications To reduce the risk of personal injury, (page 265). make sure the engine is cool before •…

  • Page 211: Severe Climates

    If you drive in extremely cold climates: The service engine soon • It may be necessary to have a Ford indicator will illuminate. authorized dealer increase the coolant If the engine reaches a preset concentration above 50%.

  • Page 212: Automatic Transmission Fluid Check

    Maintenance The engine is capable of completely amount of speed reduction will depend on shutting down automatically to prevent the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient engine damage, if this situation occurs: temperature and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe You can continue to drive your vehicle to do so and switch the ignition off.

  • Page 213: Brake Fluid Check

    Maintenance Have an authorized dealer check and 2. Add power steering fluid to the MAX change the transmission fluid at the mark. Do not overfill. correct service interval. See Scheduled 3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you Maintenance (page 440). Your feel a strong resistance.

  • Page 214: Changing The Fuel Filter

    Maintenance E184430 E177378 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Attach a tube to the drain plug and 3. Rotate the housing counterclockwise place the end of the tube into a to the unlock position. suitable container. 4. Remove the housing and filter. 2.

  • Page 215: Fuel Filter — Gasoline

    3. Open the Schrader valve. 8. Purge air from the system. 4. Switch the ignition on until a steady Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford stream of fuel can be seen coming out specification. See Fuel and Refueling of the tube.

  • Page 216: Changing The 12V Battery

    Maintenance CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY Removing the Battery WARNINGS You must replace your vehicle battery with one of exactly the same specification. Make sure the battery box is correctly sealed. Your vehicle battery is heavy; take care when lifting and removing. E152529 Note: If you have power seats and the 2.

  • Page 217: Installing The Battery

    Maintenance E146773 5. Remove the battery clamp and cover bolts. E162775 6. Remove the battery clamp and cover. 8. Remove the cable securing clips from the cover. Release the retaining clips and remove the cover. E162774 Remove the battery terminal cover. E162776 9.

  • Page 218: Checking The Wiper Blades

    Maintenance Install in the reverse order. Note: The windshield wiper blades are different in length. If you install wiper blades of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not CHECKING THE WIPER work correctly. BLADES ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the aim of the headlamp beam checked by an authorized dealer.

  • Page 219: Removing A Headlamp

    Maintenance Note: To see a clearer light pattern while 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each adjusting one headlamp, you may want to headlamp. Use a suitable tool, for block the light from the other headlamp. example a screwdriver or hexagonal socket, to turn the adjuster clockwise 3.

  • Page 220: Changing A Bulb

    Maintenance WARNINGS Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 221). The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

  • Page 221
    Maintenance Side Marker Lamp Headlamp Low Beam and Daytime Running Lamp E175740 E175742 Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 216). Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 216). 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 2.
  • Page 222: Rear Lamps

    Maintenance Side Direction Indicator 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. (If Equipped) Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Front Clearance Lamp (If Equipped) E169209 Remove the large mirror glass. Tilt the mirror glass fully up, pull the mirror glass toward you from the bottom.

  • Page 223: License Plate Lamp

    Maintenance License Plate Lamp E175745 E72789 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise Carefully release the spring clip. and remove it. 2. Remove the lamp. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Pull the bulb straight out. Interior Lamp Vehicles with Interior Sensors E175746 Tail and brake lamp.

  • Page 224: Bulb Specification Chart

    Maintenance Reading Lamps Vehicles without Interior Sensors Vehicles with Interior Sensors E99453 Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. E72786 3. Remove the bulb. Carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise Sun Visor Mirror Lamp and remove it.

  • Page 225
    Maintenance Lamp Specification Power (watt) Front I.D. lamp Front side marker lamp High beam headlamp and Daytime 9005 running lamp License plate lamp Low beam headlamp Rear clearance lamp Reversing lamp 3057K Side direction indicator Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an authorized dealer if they fail.
  • Page 226: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.5L

    Maintenance 2. Clean the area around the air tube to CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR air filter cover connection to prevent FILTER — 3.5L debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube WARNING clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube.

  • Page 227: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.7L

    Maintenance 2. Clean the area around the air tube to CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR air filter cover connection to prevent FILTER — 3.7L debris from entering the system and then loosen the bolt on the air tube WARNING clamp so the clamp is no longer snug to the air tube.

  • Page 228: Changing The Engine Air Filter — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Maintenance Only use the specified air filter. See CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR Capacities and Specifications (page FILTER — 3.2L POWER STROKE 265). DIESEL Change the air filter element and foam filler at the proper interval. See Scheduled WARNING Maintenance (page 440). To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner…

  • Page 229
    Maintenance E177562 4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 5. Install a new air filter element. Make sure that the groove seal on the pleated paper filter traps both sides of the vertical partition of the air box.
  • Page 230: Vehicle Care

    Vehicle Care Note: Some car washes use water at high CLEANING PRODUCTS pressure. Due to this, water droplets may enter inside your vehicle and could also For best results, use the following products damage certain parts of your vehicle. or products of equivalent quality: Note: Remove the aerial before using an •…

  • Page 231: Waxing

    Vehicle Care • Do not allow wax to come in contact WARNINGS with any non-body (low-gloss black) Do not allow polish to touch plastic colored trim. The wax will discolor or surfaces. It could be difficult to stain the parts over time. remove.

  • Page 232: Cleaning The Windows And Wiper Blades

    Vehicle Care Safety Belts • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical the area in and around these locations. solvents to clean them. • Cover the battery, power distribution Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate box, and air filter assembly to prevent the safety belt retractor mechanism.

  • Page 233: Repairing Minor Paint Damage

    Vehicle Care • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase 5. Following this, wipe area dry with a the gloss of the upper portion of the clean, white, cotton cloth. instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from REPAIRING MINOR PAINT undesirable windshield reflection.

  • Page 234: Vehicle Storage

    Vehicle Care • Clean the wheels weekly using • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. prevent rust. Apply using manufacturer’s • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts instructions. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent •…

  • Page 235: Removing Vehicle From Storage

    Vehicle Care Battery • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep • Check brake pedal operation. Drive connections clean. your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and • If storing your vehicle for more than 30 forth to remove rust build-up.

  • Page 236: Wheels And Tires

    Wheels and Tires How Your Vehicle Differs from GENERAL INFORMATION Other Vehicles Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can Truck Owners differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: WARNINGS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types…

  • Page 237: Tire Care

    Grades The United States of America TIRE CARE Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to Information About Uniform give you the following information Tire Quality Grades about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.

  • Page 238
    Wheels and Tires graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A performance of tires depends (the highest), B and C, upon the actual conditions of their representing the tire’s resistance use, however, and may depart to the generation of heat and its significantly from the norm due to ability to dissipate heat when variations in driving habits, service…
  • Page 239
    Wheels and Tires • Standard load: A class of • Recommended inflation P-metric or Metric tires pressure: The cold inflation designed to carry a maximum pressure found on the Safety load at set pressure. For Compliance Certification Label example: for P-metric tires (affixed to either the door hinge 35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi pillar, door-latch post, or the…
  • Page 240
    Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a United States of America DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. P Type Tires P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating.
  • Page 241
    Wheels and Tires 15: Indicates the wheel or United States of rim diameter in inches. If America DOT Tire you change the wheel Identification Number size, you will have to (TIN): This begins with purchase new tires to the letters DOT and match the new wheel indicates that the tire diameter.
  • Page 242
    Wheels and Tires manufacturers also must as measured under indicate the ply materials controlled conditions on in the tire and the specified government test sidewall, which include surfaces of asphalt and steel, nylon, polyester, concrete. A tire marked C and others. may have poor traction performance.
  • Page 243
    Wheels and Tires Note: If the tire size does not begin the driver door. The cold with a letter, this may mean it is inflation pressure should designated by either ETRTO never be set lower than (European Tire and Rim Technical the recommended Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire pressure on the vehicle…
  • Page 244
    Wheels and Tires 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
  • Page 245
    Wheels and Tires Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
  • Page 246
    Wheels and Tires four numbers represent the week Safe operation of your vehicle and year the tire was built. For requires that the tires are correctly example, the numbers 317 mean inflated. the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 Every day before you drive, check the numbers go to four digits.
  • Page 247
    Compliance Certification Label or of your vehicle. If you do not Tire Label. maintain the tire pressures as specified by Ford, your vehicle may When weather temperature experience a condition known as changes occur, tire inflation shimmy. This will cause severe pressures also change.
  • Page 248
    Wheels and Tires 6. Visually inspect the tires to Note: Some spare tires operate at make sure there are no nails or a higher inflation pressure than the other objects embedded that other tires. For T-type mini-spare could poke a hole in the tire tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare and cause an air leak.
  • Page 249
    Wheels and Tires Incorrect or inadequate vehicle Tire Damage maintenance can cause tires to Periodically inspect the tire treads wear abnormally. Inspect all the and sidewalls for damage, for tires, including the spare, example bulges in the tread or frequently, and replace them if sidewalls, cracks in the tread one or more of the following groove or separation in the tread…
  • Page 250
    Use of any tire or wheel not exceed the maximum pressure not recommended by Ford can indicated on the sidewall of the affect the safety and performance tire to set the beads without…
  • Page 251
    Driving habits have a great deal to System (If Equipped) do with your tire mileage and The use of wheels or tires not safety: recommended by Ford Motor • Observe posted speed limits. Company may affect the • Avoid fast starts, stops and operation of the tire pressure turns.
  • Page 252
    Wheels and Tires If you feel a sudden vibration or Tire Rotation ride disturbance while driving, or WARNING you suspect a tire or your vehicle has been damaged, immediately If the tire label shows reduce your speed. Drive with different tire pressures for the caution until you can safely pull front and rear tires and the vehicle off the road.
  • Page 253: Using Winter Tires

    Wheels and Tires Note: Your vehicle may have a Rear-wheel drive and dissimilar spare wheel and tire four-wheel drive vehicles with assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel dual rear wheels. and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels.

  • Page 254: Using Snow Chains

    • Avoid fully loading your vehicle. • Only certain snow chains or cables have been approved by Ford as safe for use on vehicles with either 235/65 R16C or 195/75 R16C tires. • Snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.

  • Page 255
    Wheels and Tires Each tire, including the spare (if When the malfunction indicator is provided), should be checked illuminated, the system may not be able monthly when cold and inflated to detect or signal low tire pressure as to the inflation pressure intended.
  • Page 256
    Wheels and Tires You should always have your tires serviced When the Temporary Spare Tire is by an authorized dealer. Installed Check the tire pressure periodically (at If one of the road wheels and tire needs to least monthly) using an accurate tire be replaced with the temporary spare gauge.
  • Page 257: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

    Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure Possible cause Action required warning light Tire rotation without On vehicles with different front and rear sensor training tire pressures, you must retrain the system following every tire rotation. See Tire Care (page 234). Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the system malfunction…

  • Page 258
    Decrease the least three feet (one meter) away from air pressure until the horn chirps. another Ford vehicle undergoing the Note: The single horn chirp confirms that system reset procedure. the sensor identification code has been •…
  • Page 259: Changing A Road Wheel

    If you must use a sealant, the by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be is damaged, it should be replaced rather used.

  • Page 260: Locking Lug Nuts

    Wheels and Tires When driving with one of the dissimilar The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare spare tires listed above, do not: wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) •…

  • Page 261
    Wheels and Tires Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire pressure monitoring system, the warning indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel to your vehicle. To restore the correct operation of the tire pressure monitoring system, you must have the repaired road wheel and tire assembly refitted to your vehicle.
  • Page 262
    Wheels and Tires E184880 Insert the flat end of the lug wrench into the socket. Turn counterclockwise E146813 until the spare wheel rests on the 4. Remove the retaining nut to release ground and the cable is loose. the spare wheel bracket. Vehicles With a Spare Wheel Chassis Cab and Cutaway The spare wheel is under the rear of your…
  • Page 263: Vehicle Jack

    Wheels and Tires Vehicle Jack WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack. To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P), set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is…

  • Page 264: Rear Jacking Points

    Wheels and Tires Vehicle Jack Storage The vehicle jack is under the passenger seat. The jack handle and lug wrench are located in a storage compartment in the front right-hand side stepwell. Note: The vehicle jack is in the load space area on vehicles with rear climate control.

  • Page 265: Removing A Road Wheel

    Wheels and Tires WARNINGS Chock the diagonally opposite wheel to the punctured tire with an appropriate block or wheel chock. A wheel chock may be located in the B-pillar or in a storage compartment in the front right-hand side stepwell. Make sure that the arrows on directional tires point in the direction of rotation when your vehicle is…

  • Page 266: Stowing The Wheel And Vehicle Jack

    Wheels and Tires 3. Lower your vehicle and remove the WARNINGS vehicle jack. Make sure the wheel and hub 4. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the contact surfaces are free from sequence shown. foreign material. 5. Install the wheel trim. Never use wheels or lug nuts different than the original equipment Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug…

  • Page 267: Lug Nuts

    M14 x 1.5 148 lb.ft (200 Nm) Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.

  • Page 268: Capacities And Specifications

    Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.5L Engine 3.5L V6 Ecoboost Cubic inches Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap .030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm) Compression ratio 10.0:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.5L V6 Ecoboost Engines with A/C E167467 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.7L Engine…

  • Page 269: Engine Specifications — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing 3.7L V6 Engines with A/C E167464 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS — 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL Engine 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Cubic inches Required fuel No. 2 Diesel Firing order 1-2-4-5-3 Compression ratio 15.4:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Engines with E175582 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…

  • Page 270: Motorcraft Parts — 3.5L

    WW-2049 — passenger side We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 271: Motorcraft Parts — 3.7L

    WW-2049 — passenger side We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 272: Motorcraft Parts — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability.

  • Page 273: Vehicle Identification Number

    Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Make, vehicle line, series, body NUMBER type Engine type The vehicle identification number is Check digit located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. Model year Assembly plant Production sequence number VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification…

  • Page 274: Transmission Code Designation

    Capacities and Specifications The transmission code is on the Safety TRANSMISSION CODE Compliance Certification Label. The DESIGNATION following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Code Description Six-speed automatic trans- mission 6R80 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS — 3.5L WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a…

  • Page 275: Capacities And Specifications

    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventila- 2.43 lb (1.1 kg) tion and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating, 1.76 lb (0.8 kg) ventilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent- 9.5 fl oz (280 ml) ilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,…

  • Page 276
    Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12 Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV…
  • Page 277: Capacities And Specifications — 3.7L

    Capacities and Specifications Only use fluid that meets Ford Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High specifications. Motor oils of the Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, recommended viscosity grade that meet meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925 API SN requirements and display the API Class 6.

  • Page 278
    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary 16.4 qt (15.5 L) heater Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary 14.9 qt (14.1 L) heater 13.1 qt (12.4 L) 2, 3 Automatic transmission Fuel tank 25.1 gal (95 L) Windshield and rear window washer system –…
  • Page 279
    Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2 Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B Engine coolant (Canada):…
  • Page 280
    YN-12-D Grease: ESA-M1C75-B Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. Motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines are also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled…
  • Page 281: Capacities And Specifications — 3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

    Capacities and Specifications Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High • Reduced fuel economy. Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, • Degraded brake performance. meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may CAPACITIES AND cause brake system damage. SPECIFICATIONS — 3.2L Use multi-purpose grease for door latches, hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch…

  • Page 282
    Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating, 1.76 lb (0.8 kg) ventilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, vent- 9.5 fl oz (280 ml) ilation and air conditioning A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating, 5.4 fl oz (160 ml) ventilation and air conditioning Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.
  • Page 283
    Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12 Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid XT-10-QLVC Power steering fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission MERCON LV Fluid CXT-10-LV12…
  • Page 284
    Capacities and Specifications If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grades this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. •…
  • Page 285: Audio System

    MP3 individual tracks and folder compact discs may not function correctly structures work as follows: when used in Ford CD players. • There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade…

  • Page 286: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm

    Audio System • MP3 folder mode represents a folder In track mode, the system displays and structure consisting of one level of plays the structure as if it were only one folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 of being in a specific folder).

  • Page 287: Audio System

    Audio System E175058 Display: Shows the status of the current mode selected. Clock: Press the button to select clock setup. Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band. Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency band.

  • Page 288: Clock Button

    Audio System Radio: Press the button to select different radio frequency bands. Press to cancel the menu or list browsing. Cursor up or down: Press the cursor up or down arrow buttons to adjust the settings within the menus or to move to the next radio station while listening to the radio on the FM or AM frequency band.

  • Page 289: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Premium Am/Fm/Cd

    Audio System Station Preset Buttons 2. Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to select the required level. This feature allows you to store your Note: Fade settings are only adjustable if favorite stations. They can be recalled by there are speakers in the rear of your vehicle.

  • Page 290
    Audio System E177140 — TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency band. Mute: Press the button to mute the sound. DISP: Press this button to switch the display screen off. SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or the next or previous track on a CD.
  • Page 291: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm/Cd/Sync

    Audio System Note: You can operate your audio system AUDIO UNIT — VEHICLES WITH: for up to one hour after you switch the AM/FM/CD/SYNC ignition off. Press the on and off control to operate the system with the ignition turned WARNING off.

  • Page 292
    Audio System Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections. Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information. TUNE — and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band.
  • Page 293: Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Am/Fm/Cd/Sync/Satellite Radio

    Audio System Note: You can operate your audio system AUDIO UNIT — VEHICLES WITH: for up to one hour after you switch the AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE ignition off. Press the on and off control to RADIO operate the system with the ignition turned off.

  • Page 294
    Audio System Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system choices. OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections. Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information. TUNE — and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band.
  • Page 295: Digital Radio

    Audio System The multicast indicator appears in FM DIGITAL RADIO mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not The highlighted numbers signify available available in all markets. digital channels where new or different HD Radio technology is the digital content is available.

  • Page 296
    Audio System HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
  • Page 297: Satellite Radio

    SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks news, sports, weather, traffic and of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor entertainment satellite radio channels. For Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not more information and a complete list of…

  • Page 298: Satellite Radio Reception Factors

    Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer responsible for any such programming for availability.

  • Page 299
    Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This two seconds to produce message should disappear audio for the selected shortly. channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not or system failure present.
  • Page 300: Audio Input Jack

    Audio System The audio input jack allows you to connect AUDIO INPUT JACK and play music from a portable music player through your vehicle speakers. You WARNINGS can use any portable music player Driving while distracted can result in designed for use with headphones. The loss of vehicle control, crash and audio extension cable must have a 0.14 in injury.

  • Page 301: Media Hub

    Audio System The USB port allows you to plug in media WARNINGS playing devices, memory sticks and charge against the use of any hand-held device devices (if supported). See (page 300). while driving and encourage the use of The extension cable must be long enough voice-operated systems when possible.

  • Page 302: Audio Troubleshooting

    Audio System AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING Message Description and Action Please check CD General error message for CD fault conditions. For example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try, or replace disc with known music disc. If the error persists contact an authorized dealer.

  • Page 303: Sync

    SYNC GENERAL INFORMATION • Use the advanced voice recognition SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device portable media player. This allows you to: supports this). •…

  • Page 304
    SYNC Times are subject to change due to When using SYNC: holidays. • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split SYNC Owner Account or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere Why do I need a SYNC owner account? with the operation of pedals, seats, •…
  • Page 305: Using Voice Recognition

    Make sure the interior of your vehicle is vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor as quiet as possible. Wind noise from Company and Ford of Canada will not open windows and road vibrations may access the system data for any purpose…

  • Page 306
    SYNC Voice command If you want the system to carry out the following voice settings Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback. [main menu] help Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |.
  • Page 307: Using Sync With Your Phone

    SYNC Confirmation prompts are short questions correct?». If turned off, the system simply the system asks when it is not sure of your makes a best guess as to what you request or when there are multiple possible requested and may ask you to confirm responses to your request.

  • Page 308
    SYNC Pairing a Cell Phone for the First Note: To scroll through the menus, press Time the up and down arrows on your audio system. Note: SYNC can support downloading up Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with to approximately 1000 entries per SYNC allows you to make and receive Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
  • Page 309: Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones

    SYNC Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Action Phone settings Press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices Press the OK button. Add Device Press the OK button. When the following message appears in the display. Find SYNC Press the OK button.

  • Page 310
    SYNC Voice Command Action Call ___ on Mobile You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone. This command is not available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Call ___ on Other You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone. This command is not available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
  • Page 311
    SYNC Voice Command Action Phonebook ___ in This command is not available until your cell phone information is Office completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Phonebook ___ This command is not available until your cell phone information is on Cell completely downloaded using Bluetooth. Phonebook ___ on This command is not available until your cell phone information is Other…
  • Page 312: Making A Call

    SYNC Making a Call Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description call (someone | [[a] This command is not available until your cell phone informa- name]) tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth. dial [[a] number] When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands: dial [[a] number] To confirm the number and initiate the call.

  • Page 313
    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the phone button. 2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press MENU. 3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following message appears.
  • Page 314
    SYNC Message Action and Description Press the OK button again to confirm. Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the OK button again to confirm.
  • Page 315
    SYNC Message Action and Description Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone Exit Press the OK button to to exit the phone menu. This is a cell phone-dependent feature. This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature. This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.
  • Page 316
    SYNC Reply or forward the message: Message Action and Description Text msg notify Press the OK button. Select one of the following: Reply to sender Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the list of pre-defined messages to send. Forward msg.
  • Page 317: Accessing Your Phone Settings

    6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you would like to send the message. The system sends each text message with the following signature: This message was sent from my Ford. Return Press the OK button to exit the current menu.

  • Page 318
    SYNC Press the phone button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description Phone settings Press the OK button. Select one of the following: Phone status See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming status of your connected cell phone. Press OK to select and scroll to view the information.
  • Page 319
    SYNC Message Action and Description Auto-download Automatically download your phonebook each time your cell phone connects to SYNC. Return Exit the current menu. Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since your last download.
  • Page 320
    SYNC Advanced and set prompts, languages, defaults, perform a master reset, install an The Advanced menu allows you to access application and view system information. In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following Message Action and Description Confirmation Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for a specific action.
  • Page 321: Sync Applications And Services

    SYNC SYNC APPLICATIONS AND WARNINGS Always place your phone in a secure SERVICES (If Equipped) location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged In order for the following features to work, in a crash. Failure to do so may cause your cell phone must be compatible with serious injury to someone or damage the SYNC.

  • Page 322
    SYNC Switching 911 Assist On or Off Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to: Message Action and Description 911 Assist Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu. Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the radio display.
  • Page 323
    SYNC 911 Assist May Not Work If Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation before use. Visit • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There hardware sustains damage in a crash. is no fee or subscription associated with •…
  • Page 324
    Action and Description vehicle [health] report The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information, open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
  • Page 325
    ID www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure Ford or its service providers to collect your your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID vehicle travel information or other before using SYNC Services.
  • Page 326
    SYNC Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
  • Page 327
    SYNC Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description Directions To receive directions to a location. Once you select your destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
  • Page 328: Sync Mobile Apps

    Note: For information on available apps, The system enables voice and steering supported smartphone devices and wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford smartphone apps. Once an app is running website. through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls.

  • Page 329
    SYNC Note: Make sure you have an active account Note: AppLink is not available if your for the app that you have downloaded. vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch Some apps work automatically with no system. setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites.
  • Page 330
    • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel any damages or loss of privacy relating to consumption, engine speed, rain…
  • Page 331
    This includes Data is sent to Ford in the United States any additional charges incurred due to through the connected device. The driving in areas when roaming out of a home information is encrypted and includes your network.
  • Page 332: Player

    SYNC Connecting Your Digital Media USING SYNC WITH YOUR Player to the USB Port MEDIA PLAYER Note: If your digital media player has a You can access and play music from your power switch, make sure you switch it on digital music player over your vehicle’s before plugging it in.

  • Page 333: What’s Playing

    SYNC Message Action and Description Select one of the following: Play all Artist Albums Genres Playlists Tracks Browse USB Similar music Return Exit the current menu. What’s Playing? When a track is playing, you can ask the system to tell you what is currently playing. Press the voice button and when prompted say: Voice command Action and Description…

  • Page 334: Media Voice Commands

    SYNC Media Voice Commands Voice command Press the voice button and when Refine album ___ prompted say any of the following: repeat (track | song) [on] Voice command repeat off (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) (browse | search | show) album Autoplay Off (browse | search | show) all (artist | Autoplay [on]…

  • Page 335
    SYNC Voice Command Guide Voice command Action and Description Autoplay [on] Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your music. (browse | search | show) The system searches all the data from your indexed music all (genre | genres) and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.
  • Page 336: Media Menu Features

    SYNC Bluetooth Audio Command Guide Voice command Press the voice button and when [play] next track prompted say any of the following: [play] previous track Voice command Media Menu Features [Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec- tions | [Bluetooth] Connections The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play your music, for pause example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,…

  • Page 337: Accessing Your Play Menu

    SYNC Message Action and Description Select one of the following: Shuffle Press the OK button to shuffle available media files in the current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle. Repeat Press the OK button to repeat any song.

  • Page 338
    SYNC Press the AUX button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description Menu Press the OK button to enter the media menu. Select one of the following: Play all Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the display.
  • Page 339
    SYNC Message Action and Description Tracks Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically. Press the OK button. 2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button. Browse USB Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port.
  • Page 340
    SYNC Press the AUX button, then scroll to: Message Action and Description Menu Press the OK button to enter the media menu. Settings Press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices Press the OK button. Select one of the following: Add Device Pair more devices to the system.
  • Page 341
    SYNC Advanced and set prompts, languages, defaults and perform a master reset. The Advanced menu allows you to access In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following Message Action and Description Confirmation Prompts Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or ask you for a specific action.
  • Page 342: Sync Troubleshooting

    SYNC Use the website at any time to check your SYNC TROUBLESHOOTING phone’s compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, access a customer representative via an should questions arise, see the tables online chat (during certain hours).

  • Page 343
    SYNC Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. I am having trouble This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review connecting my phone to…
  • Page 344
    SYNC USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) I am having trouble This may be a possible Try turning off the device, connecting my device. device malfunction. resetting the device, removing the device’s battery, then trying again. Make sure you are using the manufacturer’s cable.
  • Page 345
    SYNC Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) I received a text that I did You did not activate your This is a free feature, but you not activate Vehicle Health account on the website. must first register online to Report.
  • Page 346
    SYNC Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong Review the phone voice what I am saying. voice commands. commands and the media You may be speaking too voice commands at the soon or at the wrong time.
  • Page 347
    SYNC Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be Make sure you are saying the reading the name the same contacts exactly as they are way you are saying it. listed. For example, if you Contacts in your phonebook save a contact as Joe may be very short and…
  • Page 348
    AppLink. Also, some may have a «Ford SYNC» setting, so check the app’s settings menu on the phone. My phone is connected, my Sometime apps do not…
  • Page 349
    SYNC AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it.
  • Page 350
    SYNC phone listed in SYNC’s bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a «Ford Mobile Apps Menu. use to connect. If you have SYNC» setting, disable that more AppLink apps on your…
  • Page 351: Myford Touch

    MyFord Touch GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle.

  • Page 352: Myford Touch

    MyFord Touch PHONE Press to select any of the following: Press to select any of the following: Message Message Clock Phone Display Quick Dial Sound Phonebook Vehicle History Settings Messaging Help Settings HOME NAVIGATION Press to access the home screen. Press to select any of the following: E142613 Note: Depending on your vehicle s option…

  • Page 353
    MyFord Touch ENTERTAINMENT Message Press to select any of the following: Message BT Stereo SD Card SIRIUS Line In Using the Audio Controls Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls: Message Action and Description Power Switch the media features on or off. Vol: Adjust the volume of playing media.
  • Page 354
    MyFord Touch Using the Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls: Control Action and Description Adjust the volume of playing media. Seek Use as you normally would in media modes. Voice Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice prompt and begin speaking.
  • Page 355
    MyFord Touch Speed-restricted Features • Make sure the power cables do not interfere with the safe operation of your Some features of this system are restricted vehicle’s controls or affect your safe from use unless your vehicle is stationary. driving abilities. •…
  • Page 356
    System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your main menu vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not List of commands access the system data for any purpose (what are my (options | choices) | what…
  • Page 357
    MyFord Touch You can say any of the voice commands Voice command that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; [main menu] help cancel or stop or exit.
  • Page 358
    MyFord Touch Voice Command Settings Using the touchscreen, press: These allow you to customize the level of system interaction, help and feedback. The Message system defaults to standard interaction Settings that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level Help of guidance and feedback.
  • Page 359: Settings

    MyFord Touch Voice command Using the steering wheel control, press the voice button and when prompted media candidate lists on say one of the following: media candidate lists off Voice command voice settings help interaction mode novice Using Voice Commands with the interaction mode advanced Touchscreen Options confirmation prompts on…

  • Page 360
    MyFord Touch Clock Item Message Under this menu, you can set the clock, access and adjust the display, sound and Clock vehicle settings as well as access settings Display for specific modes or the help feature. Sound Vehicle E142607 Settings Help To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message…
  • Page 361
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Mode Allows you to turn the display off. It also allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system auto- matically change based on the outside light level. If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning the display’s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
  • Page 362
    MyFord Touch Only the photograph(s), which meets the Message following conditions will display: Occupancy Mode • Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp. Speed Compensated Volume • Each file must be 1.5 MB or less. • Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384. Note: Your vehicle may not have all of Sound these sound settings.
  • Page 363
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Automatic Reminders Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more information on these selections. Run Vehicle Health To run the vehicle health report immediately. Report Now You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
  • Page 364
    MyFord Touch To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Press the settings icon. Vehicle Enable Valet Mode Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted. Continue After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again.
  • Page 365
    MyFord Touch Voice Control E142607 To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Voice Control Then select from the following: Interaction Mode Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts.
  • Page 366
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Autoplay When this feature is on, the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. When this feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source.
  • Page 367
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only calculate a single route. This speeds up your destination entry process. Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo- gical route.
  • Page 368
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Have the system display traffic jam icons. Have the system display closed roads. Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned navigation routes. Phone E142607 To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings…
  • Page 369
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming, or query on connect.
  • Page 370
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing. Press ? for more information. Gateway (Access Point) Settings Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway.
  • Page 371
    MyFord Touch To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Settings Press the settings icon. Help Then select from the following: System Information Touchscreen system serial number Your vehicle identification number (VIN) Touchscreen system software version Navigation system version Map database version Sirius satellite radio ESN Gracenote®…
  • Page 372: Entertainment

    MyFord Touch ENTERTAINMENT E161892 Browsing Device Content Messa g e Message and Description When listening to audio on a device, you AM 1 and AM AST can browse through other devices without having to change sources. For example, if FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST you are currently listening to audio on an SD card, you can browse all the artists that SIRIUS…

  • Page 373
    MyFord Touch SIRIUS station (for example, «the Voice command Highway»). The following voice commands are available at the top level of the voice Browse USB session no matter which current audio Help source you are listening to (for example a USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio).
  • Page 374: Am/Fm Radio

    MyFord Touch Options Voice command Sound Settings Sirius <0-223> Touch this button to adjust settings Sports games for: This command is only usable if you have Message an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite Bass radio. Midrange The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional.

  • Page 375
    MyFord Touch player, the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter. Direct Tune E142616 Touch this button to manually enter the The HD logo either blinks when acquiring…
  • Page 376
    MyFord Touch To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select: Message Action and Description Options TAG Button When you hear a song you, select: The system automatically saves the song’s information and transfers it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it to the system.
  • Page 377
    MyFord Touch HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
  • Page 378
    HD Radio and the HD and Voice command HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Radio Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content sent using HD Then any of the following: Radio technology.
  • Page 379
    MyFord Touch Voice command Tune AM preset <#> Voice command Browse <530-1710> <87.9-107.9> FM <87.9-107.9> <87.9-107.9> HD <#> FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#> FM autoset AM <530-1710> FM autoset preset <#> AM autoset FM preset <#> AM autoset preset <#> FM 1 AM preset <#>…
  • Page 380
    MyFord Touch SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Scan Activated) Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels. Options E142611 Touch this button to view and adjust To turn the feature on press the lower various media settings. left corner of the touchscreen, and then select: Sound Settings Message…
  • Page 381
    Scroll to see more channel. categories. Touch the station you want to Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert listen to. feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation. You can also select: Message…
  • Page 382
    MyFord Touch Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) E142593 You need your ESN to activate, modify or SIRIUS satellite radio is a track your satellite radio account. The ESN subscription-based satellite radio service is on the System Information Screen (SR that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,…
  • Page 383
    MyFord Touch Troubleshooting tips Message Cause Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two No action required. This seconds to produce audio for message should disappear the selected channel. shortly. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear system failure present.
  • Page 384: Sd Card Slot And Usb Port

    MyFord Touch Press the voice button and when Sports Game prompted say: Voice command Voice command Tune to the <college name> game SIRIUS Tune to the <team city> game Then any of the following: Tune to the <team city> <team name> <Channel Name>…

  • Page 385
    MyFord Touch SD Card USB Port Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage.
  • Page 386
    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Shuffle Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder in random order. Similar Music This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing. More Info Touch this button to see disc information, for example current track, artist name, album and genre.
  • Page 387
    MyFord Touch Browse artist or album. If you want to view song information, for This feature allows you to view the example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, contents of the device. It also allows you and Genre, touch the on-screen album art. to search by categories, for example genre, You can also select: Message…
  • Page 388
    MyFord Touch Voice command Voice command Play video podcast episode All movies «» <name> All movies Play video playlist <name> «» All music videos [play] previous track All playlists repeat [all | folder | track | song] off All podcasts Repeat off All songs Repeat one…
  • Page 389: A/V Inputs

    MyFord Touch Supported Media Players, Formats Press the voice button and when and Metadata Information prompted say: SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any Voice command digital media player, including iPod, Zune , plays from device players, and Next song most USB drives.

  • Page 390
    MyFord Touch 3. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select a tuned FM station. 4. Adjust the volume as desired. 5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to ½ the maximum. 6. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen.
  • Page 391: Phone

    MyFord Touch PHONE E161968 • Using privacy mode. Item Message • Dialing a number. Phone • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. Quick Dial • Caller ID. Phonebook Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook History download, are cell phone-dependent Messaging features.

  • Page 392
    MyFord Touch Pairing Your Cell Phone for the The first thing you must do to use the First Time phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC. WARNING This allows you to use your cell phone in a hands-free manner.
  • Page 393: Making Calls

    MyFord Touch To pair a subsequent cell phone, select: Message Action and Description Phone Settings Select BT Device Add Device Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing.

  • Page 394: Phone Menu Options

    MyFord Touch Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs To turn on contact picture settings, if it as a missed call. your device supports this feature, Phone Menu Options select: Press the top left corner on the Message touchscreen to select from the following Phone options: Settings…

  • Page 395: Text Messaging

    MyFord Touch Text Messaging Message Note: Downloading and sending text Listen (speaker icon) messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features. Dial Note: Certain features in text messaging Send Text are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over View 3.1 mph (5 km/h).

  • Page 396: Phone Settings

    MyFord Touch Message Text Message Options Stuck in traffic. Message Call me later. I’ll call you back in a few minutes. I just left, I’ll be there soon. Can you give me a call? Receiving a Text Message Note: If you select View and your vehicle is I’m on my way.

  • Page 397: Phone Voice Commands

    MyFord Touch Message Action and Description Do Not Disturb If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message notifications do not ring inside the cabin either. 911 Assist Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off.

  • Page 398: Information

    MyFord Touch Voice command Voice command join (call | calls) (mute [call] off | Unmute [call]) (listen to | read) [[text] message | Help line] [number] <msg_num> These commands are only available (listen to | read) ([text] message) during an active call. [text] (messages | message) If you say messages, see the following additional commands.

  • Page 399
    SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want Note: SYNC Services requires activation Ford or its service providers to collect your before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to vehicle travel information or other register and check your eligibility for information identified in the Terms and complimentary services.
  • Page 400
    MyFord Touch Connecting to SYNC Services Using Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions Voice Commands When connected to SYNC Services, say «Directions» or «Business search». To find the closest business or type of business to your current location, just E142599 say «Business search» and then Press the voice button.
  • Page 401
    MyFord Touch If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks Tips if you want the route updated. Just say, «Yes» when prompted and the system Lions, or a news delivers a new route to your vehicle. category. You can learn more about If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, personalization by SYNC Services downloads your requested…
  • Page 402
    MyFord Touch Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible Services for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. Voice command When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, Cancel route it can help you locate the best gas prices,…
  • Page 403
    MyFord Touch Sports Info Sports-Related Commands Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can Voice command also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier Baseball access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress. College basketball Ski Conditions College football…
  • Page 404
    MyFord Touch Voice command Press Alerts, and then choose from any of the following services: MLS headlines Message Action and Description MLS schedule View The complete message MLS scores Delete The message Motor sports headlines Delete All Messages Motor sports order Motor sports schedule This screen displays any system messages (such as an SD card fault).
  • Page 405
    MyFord Touch Setting 911 Assist On WARNINGS Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in E142608 a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone, If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the I (Information) which could prevent 911 Assist from…
  • Page 406
    MyFord Touch • You must pair and connect a 911 Assist May Not Work If: Bluetooth-enabled and compatible • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist phone to SYNC. hardware sustains damage in a crash. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone • The vehicle’s battery or the SYNC must have the ability to make and system has no power.
  • Page 407
    After registering, When you create a Vehicle Health Report, you can request a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your (inside your vehicle). Return to your cellular phone number (to process your account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view report request) and diagnostic information your report.
  • Page 408: Navigation

    MyFord Touch Setting a Destination Where Am I? Press the green corner of your touchscreen, For information about your current then the Dest button when it appears. location, select: Choose any of the following: Message Action and Descrip- tion Destination Where Am I? View your vehicle’s Message…

  • Page 409: Point Of Interest (Poi) Categories

    MyFord Touch 3. Choose from up to three different types Message of routes, and then select Start Route. Health & Medicine • Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads possible. Automotive • Shortest: Uses the shortest distance Shopping possible. • Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient Entertainment &…

  • Page 410
    MyFord Touch Attraction E142639 This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple categories within the system. E142634 E142640 cityseekr, when available, is a service that When you are viewing more provides more information about certain information for hotels, cityseekr also points of interest such as restaurants, tells you if the hotel has certain hotels and attractions.
  • Page 411
    MyFord Touch Setting Your Navigation Eco Time Penalty Preferences Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the Select settings for the system to take into setting, the longer the time allotment is for account when planning your route.
  • Page 412: Map Mode

    MyFord Touch Traffic Alert Notification Have the system display traffic alert notifications. Other traffic alert features allows you to turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the map such as road work, incident, accidents and closed roads. Scroll down to view all the different types of alerts.

  • Page 413
    MyFord Touch Press the speaker button on the Scroll cursor allows you to scroll map to mute route guidance. the map; the fixed icon is in the When the light on the button center of the screen. The map E174017 E142647 illuminates, the feature is on.
  • Page 414: Quick-Touch Buttons

    MyFord Touch No GPS symbol indicates that View/Edit Route When a Route is insufficient GPS satellite signals Active are available for accurate map E142655 Subcategories positioning. This icon may display under normal operation in an area with Message poor GPS access. View Route Quick-touch Buttons Edit Destination/Waypoints…

  • Page 415
    MyFord Touch Voice command Navigation system voice commands Show route Voice command Show turn list Cancel next waypoint Voice guidance off Cancel route Voice guidance on Destination Where am I? Destination <nametag> Zoom in Destination <POI category> Zoom out Destination favorites Help Destination home These commands are only available when…
  • Page 416
    MyFord Touch Voice command Previous destination Street address Help Navigation Voice command Destination Zoom city Zoom country Zoom minimum Zoom maximum Zoom province Zoom state Zoom street Zoom to <distance> Help If you say «Destination», you can then say any command in the «Destination» chart. One-shot Destination Street Address When you say either «Navigation destination street address»…
  • Page 417: Accessories

    Ford Motor and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Company will warrant your accessory Accessories product limited warranty from through the warranty that provides the the accessory manufacturer.

  • Page 418: Auxiliary Switches

    • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect…

  • Page 419: Appendices

    The • You have acquired a device («DEVICE») additional software and services of that includes software licensed by Ford third party origin, as well as associated Motor Company and its affiliates media, printed materials, and «online»…

  • Page 420
    Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the the process. Neither FORD MOTOR recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,…
  • Page 421
    SOFTWARE («Supplemental may collect and use technical Components»). information gathered in any manner as If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party part of product support services related software and services suppliers provide or to the SOFTWARE or related services. make available to you Supplemental…
  • Page 422
    DEVICE. electronic form, you may print one copy of UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation. If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You MOTOR COMPANY separate from the acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD subject to U.S.
  • Page 423
    Adobe TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or trademarks or service marks of FORD [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] Corporation, third party software or service contains [Adobe®…
  • Page 424
    Appendices Use of Speech Recognition Functions: WARNING Speech recognition software is inherently Operating certain parts of this a statistical process which is subject to system while driving can distract errors. It is your responsibility to monitor your attention away from the road, any speech recognition functions included and possibly cause an accident or other in the system and address any errors.
  • Page 425
    Appendices Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used Telenav may revise this Agreement and by this system may be inaccurate because the privacy policy at any time, with or of changes in roads, traffic controls or without notice to you. You agree to visit driving conditions.
  • Page 426
    Appendices 2. Account Information or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) You agree: (a) when registering the violates any law, statute, ordinance or Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with regulation, including but not limited to laws true, accurate, current, and complete and regulations related to spamming, information about yourself, and (b) to…
  • Page 427
    Appendices COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY…
  • Page 428
    Appendices the terms and conditions of this Notices by posting them on Telenav’s Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or Website or by downloading such Notices transfer that is not expressly permitted to your wireless device. If you desire to under this paragraph will result in withdraw your consent to receive Notices immediate termination of this Agreement, electronically, you must discontinue your…
  • Page 429
    Appendices Agreement), and thus your use of the 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 Telenav Software is also subject to such (Shanghai) Co., Ltd terms. You agree to comply with the The data (“Data”) is provided for your following additional terms and conditions, personal, internal use only and not for which are applicable to Telenav’s third resale.
  • Page 430
    Appendices Disclaimer of Liability: positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS devices, including without limitation (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND cellular phones, palmtop and handheld SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO computers, pagers, and personal digital YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, assistants or PDAs.
  • Page 431
    Appendices that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying NOTICE OF USE with any of its obligations hereunder to CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
  • Page 432
    Appendices 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least…
  • Page 433
    Appendices either express or implied, arising by II. Mexico. The following provision applies law or otherwise, including but not to the Data for Mexico, which includes limited to, effectiveness, complete- certain data from the Instituto Nacional ness, accuracy or fitness for a de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): particular purpose.
  • Page 434
    Appendices A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies V. Europe Territory of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to 1.
  • Page 435
    Appendices is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- und written consent from Kartografie a.s.; Vermessungswesen” (c) such license for selling or distributing Croatia with respect to Data for the Territory of Cyprus, Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Estonia, obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Latvia,…
  • Page 436
    Appendices Sweden “Based upon electronic data Product incorporates data which is © © National Land Survey 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Sweden.” Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. Switzer- “Topografische Grundlage: © land Bundesamt für Landestopo- B.
  • Page 437
    Appendices No Other Warranty: with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY wireless-connected electronic or computer SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT devices, including without limitation PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 cellular phones, palmtop and handheld AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR computers, pagers, and personal digital…
  • Page 438
    Appendices Export Control Gracenote® Copyright You agree not to export to anywhere any CD and music-related data from part of the Data provided to you or any Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 direct product thereof except in Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright compliance with, and with all licenses and ©…
  • Page 439
    Appendices You agree that you will use the content THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM from Gracenote («Gracenote Content») , OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED and Gracenote Servers for your own TO YOU «AS IS». NEITHER GRACENOTE personal, non-commercial use only.
  • Page 440
    Appendices Vehicle with SYNC only United States and Mexico FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1 Mexico Model: KMHSG1P1 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
  • Page 441: Extended Service Plan (Esp)

    3. BaseCARE — Covers 84 components. Transferable Coverage 4. PowertrainCARE — Covers 29 critical If you sell your vehicle before your Ford components. Extended Service Plan coverage expires, Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by you can transfer any remaining coverage all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,…

  • Page 442: Service Plans (Canada Only)

    Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan scheduled maintenance, and selected is the only service contract backed by Ford wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so Motor Company of Canada, Limited. you never have to worry about affording Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford your vehicle’s maintenance.

  • Page 443: Scheduled Maintenance

    If you do not use Ford authorized parts they you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for may not meet our specifications and completed maintenance with your vehicle.

  • Page 444: Owner Checks And Services

    When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals the information display, it is time for an oil This owner’s manual and the Ford change. Make sure you perform the oil Workshop Manual list the recommended change within two weeks or 500 miles additives and chemicals for your vehicle.

  • Page 445: Multi-Point Inspection

    Scheduled Maintenance Multi-point inspection Check every six months Exterior lamps and hazard warning Battery connections. Clean if necessary. system operation. Body and door drain holes for obstruc- Fluid levels ; fill if necessary. tions. Clean if necessary. For oil and fluid leaks. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

  • Page 446: Normal Scheduled Maintenance

    Scheduled Maintenance important factors in its calculations, the NORMAL SCHEDULED monitor helps reduce the cost of owning MAINTENANCE your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® The following table provides examples of (Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L vehicle use and its impact on oil change Engine) intervals.

  • Page 447: Scheduled Maintenance

    Scheduled Maintenance Normal Maintenance Intervals 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Change engine oil and filter. Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick).

  • Page 448: Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance

    Scheduled Maintenance Other maintenance items Replace spark plugs. Every 100000 miles (160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Every 150000 miles Change rear axle fluid. (240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change.

  • Page 449
    Scheduled Maintenance Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery) As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
  • Page 450
    During long periods before the completion of your vehicle’s of trailer towing with outside temperatures useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open urges you to have all recommended throttle for long periods above 45 mph…
  • Page 451: Scheduled Maintenance Record

    Scheduled Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…

  • Page 452
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 453
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 454
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 455
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 456
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 457
    Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing…
  • Page 458
    Index Audio Input Jack………..297 Audio System……….282 General Information………282 Audio Troubleshooting……299 See: Climate Control……….88 Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ About This Manual………..7 SYNC/Satellite Radio……290 Protecting the Environment……..7 Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC………….288 See: Brakes…………136 Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/ ABS driving hints FM…………..283 See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock…
  • Page 459
    Index Changing the Engine Air Filter — 3.5L…………..223 Changing the Engine Air Filter — California Proposition 65……10 3.7L…………..224 Capacities and Specifications — 3.2L Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Power Stroke Diesel………278 Filter……………205 Capacities………….278 Engine Lubrication for Severe Service Specifications…………279 Operation…………205 Capacities and Specifications — Changing the Wiper Blades……215…
  • Page 460
    Index Creating a MyKey……….47 Emission Control System……122 Programming/Changing Configurable Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation Catalyst Settings……………47 And Diesel Particulate Filter System Cruise Control……….62 …………….124 Principle of Operation……..146 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Cruise control Tampering Acts and Maintenance…131 See: Using Cruise Control……..146 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)….122 Cup Holders…………103 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance…
  • Page 461
    Fuel Gauge…………..73 Safety Belt Locking Modes…….28 Information Display……….72 Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy…27 Tripmeter Reset and Distance to Floor Mats…………173 Empty…………..73 Ford Credit…………10 General Information on Radio Frequencies………..43 (U.S. Only)……………10 Fuel and Refueling……..109 General Maintenance Information..440 Fuel Consumption……..120 Multi-point Inspection……..442 Calculating Fuel Economy……..121…
  • Page 462
    Index Head Restraints……….93 Installing Child Seats……..14 Adjusting the Head Restraint……94 Child Seats……………14 Installing the Head Restraint ……94 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts……15 Removing the Head Restraint……94 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Heated Windows and Mirrors….92 Children (LATCH)……….17 Heated Exterior Mirrors……..92 Using Tether Straps……….19 Instrument Cluster………72 Heated Rear Window……….92…
  • Page 463
    Index Locking and Unlocking………53 Automatic Locking……….56 Automatic Unlocking……….56 Navigation…………405 Configurable Unlocking……..57 cityseekr……………406 Locking…………..53 Map Mode…………409 Locking and Unlocking Confirmation…53 Navigation Map Updates……..411 Locking and Unlocking the Doors From Navigation Voice Commands……411 Inside…………..53 Point of Interest (POI) Categories….406 One-Stage Unlocking………56 Quick-touch Buttons……….411 Opening and Closing the Double Rear Setting a Destination……..405 Doors…………..54…
  • Page 464
    Index Personalized Settings……..82 Refueling…………118 Measure Units…………82 Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System….120 Remote Control……….43 Switching Chimes Off or On……82 Phone…………..388 Car Finder…………..44 Making Calls…………390 Integrated Key head Transmitter….43 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones….389 Programming a New Remote Control..44 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Replacing the Battery………44 Time…………..389 Sounding a Panic Alarm……..45…
  • Page 465
    Index Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator Starting a Diesel Engine……105 Chime…………..29 Cold Weather Operation………106 Conditions of operation……..30 Engine Glow Plugs……….105 Safety Canopy ……….40 Failure to Start…………106 Safety Precautions……..109 Starting a Cold or Hot Engine……106 Satellite Radio……….294 Starting a Gasoline Engine…….104 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number Before starting the engine check the (ESN)…………..295…
  • Page 466
    Switching Cruise Control On……146 Using MyKey With Remote Start Transportation Tire Quality Systems…………50 Grades……………234 Tire Pressure Monitoring System….251 Vehicles With Ford-Approved Aftermarket Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Remote Start Systems………50 Monitoring System……..252 Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Aftermarket Remote Start Procedure…………254…
  • Page 467: Using Sync With Your Phone

    Index Using SYNC With Your Phone…304 Accessing Features Through the Phone Menu…………..310 Warning Lamps and Indicators….74 Accessing Your Phone Settings…..314 Anti-Lock Brake System……..74 Making a Call…………309 Battery…………..74 Pairing a Cell Phone for the First Brake System…………74 Time…………..305 Diesel Warning Lamps……..74 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones….306 Direction Indicator……….75 Phone Options during an Active Call..309…

с бензиновыми двигателями EcoBoost Ti-VCT GTDI 1.0 л (998 см³) 100 л.с./ 74 кВт, EcoBoost 1.6 л (1596 см³) 150-181 л.с./ 110-133 кВт, Duratec 2.5 л (2488 см³) 171 л.с./ 126 кВт и дизельными Duratorq-TDCI 1.6 л (1560 см³) 95-115 л.с./ 70-85 кВт. Инструкция пользователя Форд Транзит Коннект / Турнео Коннект переднеприводные модели с короткой и длинной колесной базой второго поколения выпуска с 2013 года читать онлайн, скачать

Видео Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect замена моторного масла и обзор (Форд Турнео Коннект 2015)

Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect Mark II общая информация (Форд Турнео Коннект 2015)

Ford Connect / Tourneo Connect Mark II (Форд Турнео Коннект 2015)

Добавление масла. Если не удается найти масло, соответствующее техническим
характеристикам, определенным в документах WSS-M2C948-B или WSS-M2C913-C,
то следует использовать масло SAE 5W-30, соответствующее техническим
характеристикам, которые определены в ACEA A5/B5.

Используйте масло и рабочие жидкости, соответствующие заданным техническим
характеристикам и классам вязкости. Использование масла и рабочих жидкостей,
не соответствующих заданным техническим характеристикам и классам вязкости,
может привести к следующим неполадкам:
• повреждение компонентов, не покрываемое гарантией на автомобиль
• удлинение периодов прокручивания коленчатого вала двигателя
• повышение уровней выбросов
• уменьшение производительности двигателя
• уменьшение топливной экономичности.

ПРОВЕРКА МОТОРНОГО МАСЛА
1. Перед проверкой убедитесь, что автомобиль находится на ровной поверхности.
2. Проверьте уровень масла до запуска двигателя или выключите двигатель и подождите 10 минут, чтобы масло стекло в поддон картера.
3. Извлеките масляный щуп и вытрите его чистой безворсовой ветошью. Чтобы проверить уровень масла, установите щуп и извлеките его снова.
Если уровень масла находится на минимальной отметке, немедленно долейте масло.

Рабочие жидкости

Деталь Спецификации Коэффициент вязкости Рекомендуемая рабочая жидкость
Моторное масло для двигателя / Motor Oil WSS-M2C948-B / WSS-M2C913-C (2.0L EcoBoost)
WSS-M2C913-D (Дизельные Duratorq)
SAE 5W-20 / SAE 5W-30 / SAE 0W-30 Motorcraft Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP / Full Synthetic XO-5W20-QFS / Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 /Альтернативное моторное масло Castrol
Смазка для автоматической коробки передач / Automatic Transmission Fluid WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV — — Motorcraft MERCON LV XT-10-QLV
Смазка для механической коробки передач / 6-Speed Manual transaxle fluid WSS-M2C200-D2 — — Motorcraft Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid XT-11-QDC
Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid — —
Раздаточная коробка передач (4х4) / Power Transfer ( L) Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) — —
Охлаждающая жидкость двигателя / Coolant WSS-M97B44-D / WSS-M97B44-D2 — — Охлаждающая жидкость Super Plus Premium 4U7J-19544-xxxx/Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B
Тормозная жидкость / Brake Fluid WSS-M6C65-A2 или ISO 4925 Class 6 — — Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance BU7J-M6C65-xxxx / Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-1-C
Жидкость омывателя ветрового стекла / Windshield Wash Concentrate WSS-M14P19-A — — 5U7J-19C544-AA, 3U7J-19523-GA, 2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA / Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 / CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F) (Canada)
Смазка спрей / Grease Spray Door latch, hood Not applicable latch, trunk latch and seat tracks ESB-M1C93-B — — Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5 or CRC SL3151ESB
Хладагент для системы воздушного кондиционирования / Refrigerant WSH-M17B19-A — — Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 / CYN-16-R (Canada)
Смазка для системы воздушного кондиционирования / Compressor Oil WSH-M1C231-B — — Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D
Смазка / Grease Lock cylinder ESA-M1C75-B — — Motorcraft Penet rating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 (U.S.) / Motorcraft Penetrating fluid CXC-51-A (Canada)
Проникающая жидкость / Penetrating and Lock Lubricant — — Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1

Информация для заправочной станции

Заправочные объемы (л) / Capacity (qt) 1.0 литра EcoBoost 1.6 литра EcoBoost 1.6 литра Duratorq
Масло для двигателя / Engine lubrication system
— с фильтром / including the oil filter
— без фильтра / including the oil filter
4.1 литра (4.3 qt)
4.0 литра (4.2 qt)
4.1 литра (4.3 qt)
3.75 литра (4.0 qt)
6.2 литра (6.6 qt)
5.8 литра (6.2 qt)
Объемы доливки моторного масла 1.0 литра 0.75 литра 2.4 литра
Ручная КП / 5 and 6-Speed Manual transaxle fluid нет данных
Раздаточная коробка передач (4х4) / Power Transfer (L) Unit (PTU) (All Wheel Drive) — —
Смазка для автоматической коробки передач
Automatic transmission fluid
8.5 литра (9.0 qt) / 1.7 литра (объемы доливки)
Хладагент для системы воздушного кондиционирования / A/C refrigerant 0.68 кг (1.5 lb)
Хладагент для системы воздушного кондиционирования с ресивером / A/C refrigerant — with auxiliary system 0.875 кг (1.9 lb)
Смазка для системы воздушного кондиционирования с ресивером / A/C refrigerant compressor oil — with auxiliary system 220 мл (7.4 fl oz)
Смазка для системы воздушного кондиционирования / A/C refrigerant compressor oil 136 мл (4.6 fl oz)
Задняя ось / Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) — —
Гидроусилитель руля Между отметками MIN и MAX
Система охлаждения / Engine cooling system 5.85 литра (6.2 qt) 9.1 литра (9.7 qt) 7.3 литра (7.8 qt)
Система омывания стекол и заднего стекла, включая омыватели фар/ Windshield washer fluid 3.0 литра (3.2 qt)
Бензобак / Fuel tank 60.0 литров (15.85 gal)
Тормозная система Между отметками MIN и MAX

Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect 2015 салон
Габаритные размеры Форд Транзит Коннект / Турнео Коннект (dimensions Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect 2015)

Основные технические характеристики (General technical specifications) Ford Tourneo Connect 2015 короткая колесная база с мотором 1.6 литра

Спецификация / Specs Данные
Габариты (мм/mm) и масса (кг/kg) / Dimensions and Weight
1 Длина / Length 4418 (4818 — длинная колесная база)
2 Ширина (без/с зеркалами) / Width 1830/2137
3 Высота(загружен/пустой) / Height 1852 (1845 — длинная колесная база)
4 Колёсная база / Wheelbase 2662 (3062 — длинная колесная база)
5 Дорожный просвет (клиренс) / Ground clearance 140
6 Снаряжённая масса / Total (curb) weight 1477
Полная масса / Gross (max.) weight 2055

Двигатель / Engine

7 Тип / Engine Type, Code Дизельный, жидкостного охлаждения, четырехтактный, Duratorq-TDCI
8 Количество цилиндров / Cylinder arrangement: Total number of cylinders, of valves 4-цилиндровый, 8V, рядный, DOHC с верхним расположением двух распределительных валов
9 Диаметр цилиндра / Bore 75.0 мм
10 Ход поршня / Stroke 88.3 мм
11 Объём / Engine displacement 1560 см³
12 Система питания / Fuel supply, Aspiration Непосредственный впрыск топлива / Common Rail
Турбонаддув и охлаждение наддувочного воздуха
13 Степень сжатия / Compression ratio 16.0:1
14 Максимальная мощность / Max. output power kW (HP) at rpm 115 кВт (85 л.с.) при 3600 об/мин
15 Максимальный крутящий момент / Max. torque N·m at rpm 270-285 Нм (в зависимости от наддува) при 1750-2000 об/мин

Трансмиссия / Transmission

16 Сцепление / Clutch type Однодисковое, сухое, с диафрагменной нажимной пружиной и гасителем крутильных колебаний, постоянно замкнутого типа
17 КПП / Transmission type МКПП 6 шестиступенчатая механическая, двухвальная, с синхронизаторами на всех передачах переднего хода

О Книге

  • Название: Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect 2015 Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию
  • Бензиновые двигатели: EcoBoost Ti-VCT GTDI 1.0 л (998 см³) 100 л.с./ 74 кВт, EcoBoost 1.6 л (1596 см³) 150-181 л.с./ 110-133 кВт, Duratec 2.5 л (2488 см³) 171 л.с./ 126 кВт и дизельными Duratorq-TDCI 1.6 л (1560 см³) 95-115 л.с./ 70-85 кВт
  • Выпуск с 2014 года
  • Серия: «Owner Guide»
  • Год издания: 2014
  • Автор: Коллектив авторов
  • Издательство: «Ford Motor Company»
  • Формат: PDF
  • Страниц в книге: 362
  • Размер: 25.11 МБ
  • Язык: Русский
  • Количество электросхем: 0

Ford Transit Connect / Tourneo Connect 2015 руководство по эксплуатации с бензиновыми двигателями EcoBoost Ti-VCT GTDI 1.0 л, EcoBoost 1.6 л, Duratec 2.5 л и дизельными Duratorq-TDCI 1.6 л Инструкция пользователя Форд Транзит Коннект / Турнео Коннект с 2013

Ford Transit Custom 2015 User Manual

FORD TOURNEO CUSTOM /

TRANSIT CUSTOM Owner’s Manual

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.

© Ford Motor Company 2014

All rights reserved.

Part Number: EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) 05/2014 20140501165133

Table of Contents

Introduction

Manual Liftgate………………………………………..

33

About This Manual…………………………………….

5

Security

Symbols Glossary………………………………………

5

Data Recording…………………………………………..

7

Passive Anti-Theft System…………………….

34

Replacement Parts

8

Anti-Theft Alarm……………………………………..

34

Recommendation………………………………….

Steering Wheel

Special Notices………………………………………….

8

Mobile Communications

Adjusting the Steering Wheel………………..

35

Equipment………………………………………………

8

Audio Control……………………………………………

35

At a Glance

Voice Control……………………………………………

36

10

Cruise Control…………………………………………..

36

At a Glance………………………………………………..

Information Display Control

37

Child Safety

Installing Child Seats……………………………….

15

Child Seat Positioning……………………………..

19

Child Safety Locks……………………………………

22

Safety Belts

Fastening the Safety Belts……………………..

23

Safety Belt Height Adjustment……………..

24

Safety Belt Minder…………………………………..

24

Supplementary Restraints

System

Principle of Operation…………………………….

26

Driver Airbag……………………………………………..

26

Passenger Airbag…………………………………….

26

Side Airbags……………………………………………..

28

Side Curtain Airbags……………………………….

28

Keys and Remote Controls

General Information on Radio

Frequencies…………………………………………..

29

Remote Control……………………………………….

29

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control…………………………………………………..

29

Locks

Locking and Unlocking……………………………

30

Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers………………………………….

38

Autowipers……………………………………………….

38

Windshield Washers……………………………….

39

Rear Window Wiper and Washers………..

39

Lighting

General Information…………………………………

41

Lighting Control………………………………………..

41

Autolamps………………………………………………..

42

Instrument Lighting Dimmer…………………

43

Headlamp Exit Delay………………………………

43

Daytime Running Lamps………………………..

43

Automatic High Beam Control……………..

44

Front Fog Lamps……………………………………..

45

Rear Fog Lamps………………………………………

46

Headlamp Leveling…………………………………

46

Cornering Lamps……………………………………..

47

Direction Indicators………………………………….

47

Interior Lamps………………………………………….

48

Windows and Mirrors

Power Windows………………………………………

49

Exterior Mirrors…………………………………………

50

Interior Mirror……………………………………………

50

Sun Shades……………………………………………….

51

1

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Table of Contents

Instrument Cluster

Gauges………………………………………………………

52

Warning Lamps and Indicators……………..

53

Audible Warnings and Indicators………….

56

Information Displays

General Information………………………………..

57

Clock………………………………………………………….

64

Trip Computer………………………………………….

64

Personalized Settings…………………………….

64

Information Messages……………………………

64

Climate Control

Principle of Operation…………………………….

70

Air Vents…………………………………………………….

70

Manual Climate Control…………………………..

71

Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate…………………………………………………..

72

Heated Windows and Mirrors………………..

73

Auxiliary Heater………………………………………..

74

Seats

Sitting in the Correct Position………………..

79

Head Restraints……………………………………….

79

Manual Seats…………………………………………..

80

Power Seats………………………………………………

81

Rear Seats…………………………………………………

83

Heated Seats……………………………………………

86

Glasses Holder………………………………………….

91

Under Seat Storage………………………………….

91

Starting and Stopping the

Engine

General Information………………………………..

93

Ignition Switch…………………………………………

93

Steering Wheel Lock……………………………….

93

Starting a Diesel Engine…………………………

94

Diesel Particulate Filter………………………….

94

Switching Off the Engine……………………….

95

Engine Block Heater………………………………..

95

Unique Driving Character-

istics

Auto-Start-Stop………………………………………

97

Fuel and Refueling

Safety Precautions………………………………….

99

Fuel Quality…………………………………………….

100

Running Out of Fuel………………………………

100

Catalytic Converter…………………………………

101

Refueling………………………………………………….

102

Fuel Consumption…………………………………

103

Technical Specifications………………………

105

Transmission

Manual Transmission……………………………

106

Hill Start Assist………………………………………

106

Auxiliary Power Points

Auxiliary Power Points……………………………

88

Brakes

Cigar Lighter……………………………………………..

89

General Information………………………………

107

Storage Compartments

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes…………………………………………………..

107

Cup Holders

90

Parking Brake………………………………………….

107

Overhead Console…………………………………..

90

Traction Control

Ashtray

90

Principle of Operation

109

Folding Tray

90

Using Traction Control

109

Bottle Holder

90

2

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Table of Contents

Stability Control

Principle of Operation……………………………

110

Using Stability Control…………………………..

110

Parking Aids

Principle of Operation……………………………..

111

Parking Aid………………………………………………..

111

Rear View Camera…………………………………..

113

Cruise Control

Principle of Operation…………………………….

116

Using Cruise Control……………………………….

116

Driving Aids

Speed Limiter…………………………………………..

118

Driver Alert……………………………………………….

119

Lane Keeping System……………………………..

121

Eco Mode…………………………………………………

122

Load Carrying

General Information………………………………

124

Rear Loadspace Hatches……………………..

124

Roof Racks and Load Carriers……………..

124

Roof Racks and Load Carriers — Vehicles

With: Integrated Roof Rack……………….

125

Load Retaining Fixtures…………………………

126

Towing

Towing a Trailer………………………………………

129

Trailer Sway Control………………………………

130

Towing Points…………………………………………

130

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels…….

131

Floor Mats………………………………………………..

133

Roadside Emergencies

Hazard Warning Flashers………………………

135

First Aid Kit………………………………………………

135

Warning Triangle…………………………………….

135

Fuel Shutoff…………………………………………….

135

Jump Starting the Vehicle…………………….

135

Fuses

Fuse Box Locations………………………………..

138

Fuse Specification Chart………………………

139

Changing a Fuse…………………………………….

148

Maintenance

General Information………………………………

149

Opening and Closing the Hood……………

149

Under Hood Overview…………………………..

150

Engine Oil Dipstick………………………………….

151

Engine Oil Check……………………………………..

151

Engine Coolant Check……………………………

152

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check………………

152

Power Steering Fluid Check………………….

153

Washer Fluid Check……………………………….

153

Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap……..

153

Changing the 12V Battery……………………..

154

Checking the Wiper Blades………………….

156

Changing the Wiper Blades………………….

156

Removing a Headlamp………………………….

157

Changing a Bulb…………………………………….

158

Bulb Specification Chart………………………

164

Technical Specifications……………………….

165

Driving Hints

Vehicle Care

Breaking-In………………………………………………

132

Cleaning the Exterior……………………………..

166

Reduced Engine Performance……………..

132

Cleaning the Interior………………………………

166

Economical Driving………………………………..

132

Repairing Minor Paint Damage…………….

167

Cold Weather Precautions……………………

133

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels……………………

167

Driving Through Water…………………………..

133

3

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Table of Contents

Wheels and Tires

General Information………………………………

168

Temporary Mobility Kit………………………….

168

Tire Care……………………………………………………

171

Using Snow Chains…………………………………

172

Tire Pressure Monitoring System…………

172

Changing a Road Wheel……………………….

176

Technical Specifications……………………….

182

Capacities and Specific-

ations

Vehicle Identification Plate………………….

184

Vehicle Identification Number……………..

185

Technical Specifications……………………….

185

Audio System

General Information………………………………

189

Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/

CD…………………………………………………………

190

Audio Unit — Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/

Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) Radio/

SYNC…………………………………………………….

195

Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Digital Audio

Broadcast (DAB) Radio/Navigation

System/SYNC……………………………………

200

Audio Unit — Vehicles With: Digital Audio

Broadcast (DAB) Radio……………………

206

Digital Radio……………………………………………

215

Audio Input Jack……………………………………..

216

USB Port…………………………………………………..

217

Audio Troubleshooting…………………………..

217

Navigation

Navigation………………………………………………

254

Appendices

Electromagnetic Compatibility…………..

263

End User License Agreement……………..

264

SYNC™

General Information………………………………

218

Using Voice Recognition……………………….

219

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone…………

222

SYNC™ Applications and Services……

233

Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player…………………………………………………..

240

SYNC™ Troubleshooting…………………….

246

4

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Introduction

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.

5

This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.

A Right-hand side

BLeft-hand side

Protecting the Environment

You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner’s Manual

Air conditioning system

Anti-lock braking system

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Introduction

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid — non petroleum based

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

6

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten safety belt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartment release

Jack

Keep out of reach of children

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Introduction

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

Panic alarm

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Shield the eyes

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDING

A large number of electronic components of your vehicle contain data storage modules temporarily or permanently storing technical data about the condition of the vehicle, events and errors.

In general, this technical information documents the condition of parts, modules, systems or the environment:

Operating conditions of system components (e.g. filling levels).

Status messages of the vehicle and its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/rotational speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration).

Malfunction and defects in important system components (e.g. lighting and brake system).

Vehicle reactions in particular driving situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag, activation of the stability regulation system).

Environmental conditions (e.g. temperature).

These data are exclusively technical and help identification and correction of errors as well as optimisation of vehicle functions. Motion profiles indicating travelled routes cannot be created with these data.

If services are used (e.g. repair works, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), employees of the service network (including manufacturers) are able to read out this technical information from the event and error data storage modules using special diagnostic devices. If required, you will receive further information. After an error has been corrected, these data are deleted from the error storage module or they are constantly overwritten.

7

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Introduction

When using the vehicle, situations may occur in which these technical data related to other information (accident report, damages on the vehicle, witness statements etc.) may be associated with a specific person — possibly, with the assistance of an expert.

Additional functions contractually agreed upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location in emergency cases) allow the transmission of particular vehicle data from the vehicle.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION

Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.

Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs

One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.

Collision Repairs

We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle

8

development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement Parts

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICES

If converting or modifying your vehicle from production specification, refer to the Body and Equipment Mounting Manual at www.etis.ford.com/fordservice.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios.

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Introduction

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

9

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

At a Glance

Front Exterior Overview

ASee Maintenance (page 149).

BSee Changing the Wiper Blades (page 156).

C See Driving Aids (page 118). See Automatic High Beam Control (page 44). D See Locking and Unlocking (page 30).

ESee Changing a Road Wheel (page 176).

F Tire pressures. See Technical Specifications (page 182).

G See Changing a Bulb (page 158).

HSee Towing Points (page 130).

10

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

At a Glance

Vehicle Interior Overview

ASee Transmission (page 106).

B See Locking and Unlocking (page 30).

CSee Power Windows (page 49).

D See Fastening the Safety Belts (page 23). E See Head Restraints (page 79).

FSee Seats (page 79).

GSee Parking Brake (page 107).

11

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

At a Glance

Instrument Panel Overview

Left-Hand Drive

12

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

At a Glance

Right-Hand Drive

AAir vents. See Air Vents (page 70).

BHeated rear window switch. Heated windshield switch. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 73).

CDirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 47). High beam. See

Lighting Control (page 41).

DLeft-hand drive vehicles — Information display control. See Information Displays (page 57).

DRight-hand drive vehicles — Information and entertainment display control. See

Information Displays (page 57). See Audio System (page 189). See Navigation (page 254).

EInstrument cluster. See Gauges (page 52). See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 53).

FLeft-hand drive vehicles — Information and entertainment display control. See

Information Displays (page 57). See Audio System (page 189). See Navigation (page 254).

13

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

At a Glance

FRight-hand drive vehicles — Information display control. See Information Displays (page 57).

GWiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 38).

HParking aid switch. See Parking Aid (page 111). Start-stop switch. See

Auto-Start-Stop (page 97).

IInformation and entertainment display.

JAudio unit. See Audio System (page 189).

KDoor lock indicator. See Locking and Unlocking (page 30).

L Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 135). M Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 70).

NIgnition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 93).

OVehicles with information and entertainment display control — Audio control. See Audio Control (page 35). Voice control. See Voice Control (page 36).

PSteering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 35).

QHorn.

RCruise control switches. See Cruise Control (page 116).

SLighting control. See Lighting Control (page 41). Front fog lamps. See Front Fog Lamps (page 45). Rear fog lamps. See Rear Fog Lamps (page 46). Headlamp leveling control. See Headlamp Leveling (page 46). Instrument lighting dimmer. See Instrument Lighting Dimmer (page 43).

14

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS

WARNINGS

WARNINGS

Extreme Hazard! Never use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an active airbag in

front of it. Death or serious injury to the child can occur.

Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger airbag deactivation switch. See Passenger Airbag

(page 26). You must switch the airbag off when using a rearward facing child seat on the front seat. Make sure you switch the airbag back on following removal of the rearward facing child seat.

Use an approved child seat to secure children less than 60 in (150 cm) tall on the rear seat.

Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions when you are installing a child seat.

Do not modify child seats in any way.

Do not hold a child on your lap when your vehicle is moving.

Do not leave unattended children in your vehicle.

If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the child seats checked by an authorized dealer.

Only child seats certified to ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested and approved for use in your vehicle. A choice of these are available from an authorized dealer.

Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies from country to country.

Child Seats for Different Mass Groups

Use the correct child seat as follows:

15

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

Rearward Facing Baby Safety Seat

Secure children that weigh less than 29 lb (13 kg) in a rearward facing baby safety seat (Group 0+) on the rear seat.

Child Safety Seat

Secure children that weigh between 29 lb (13 kg) and 40 lb (18 kg) in a child safety seat (Group 1) on the rear seat.

Booster Seats

WARNINGS

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with only the lap strap of the safety belt.

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a safety belt that is slack or twisted.

Do not put the safety belt under your child’s arm or behind their back.

Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child’s height.

Make sure that your children sit in an upright position.

When using a child seat on a rear seat, the child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. It must not

touch the head restraint. If necessary remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 79).

You must reinstall the head restraint following the removal of the child seat. See Head Restraints (page

79).

Secure children that weigh more than 33 lb (15 kg) but are less than 60 in (150 cm) tall in a booster seat or a booster cushion.

16

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

Booster Seat (Group 2)

We recommend that you use a booster seat that combines a cushion with a backrest instead of a booster cushion only. The raised seating position will allow you to position the shoulder strap of the adult safety belt over the center of your child’s shoulder and the lap strap tightly across their hips.

Booster Cushion (Group 3)

ISOFIX Anchor Points

WARNING

Use an anti-rotation device when using the ISOFIX system. We recommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that accommodate universally approved ISOFIX child seats.

The ISOFIX system has two rigid attachment arms on the child seat that attach to anchor points on the second row seats, where the cushion and backrest meet. Tether anchor points are fitted to the underside or rear of the second row seats for child seats with a top tether.

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX seat, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for the intended seating locations. See Child Seat Positioning (page 19).

17

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

Attaching a Child Seat with Top Tethers

WARNING

Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the correct top tether strap anchor point.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installing a child seat with a top tether.

Type 1

Type 2

Attaching a Child Seat with a Support Leg

WARNINGS

Make sure the support leg is long enough to reach the vehicle floor.

Make sure that the child seat manufacturer lists your vehicle as suitable for use with this type of child

seat.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installing a child seat with a support leg.

18

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGS

See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child seats.

WARNINGS

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child seat on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

When using a child seat with a support leg, the support leg must rest securely on the floor.

When using a child seat with a safety belt, make sure that the safety belt is not slack or twisted.

The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. Remove the head restraint when using a forward

facing child seat. See Head Restraints (page 79).

You must reinstall the head restraint following the removal of the child seat. See Head Restraints (page

79).

Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger’s seat to its fully rearward position. If it proves difficult to tighten the lap section of the safety belt without slack remaining, adjust the seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat. See Seats (page 79).

19

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

Mass group categories

Seating positions

0

0+

1

2

3

Up to 22

Up to 29

20 — 40 lbs

33 — 55 lbs

46 — 79 lbs

lbs (10 kg)

lbs (13 kg)

(9 — 18 kg)

(15 — 25 kg)

(22 — 36 kg)

Front passenger’s seat

X

X

UF¹

UF¹

UF¹

with airbag ON

Front passenger’s seat

with airbag OFF

Rear seats second and

U

U

U

U

U

third row

Rear seats fourth row —

X

X

X

X

X

bus

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.

U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rear seat.

UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rear seat.

20

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

ISOFIX Child Seats

Seating positions

Rear ISOFIX second row

ISOFIX size class — second row*

Rear ISOFIX third row ISOFIX size class — third row*

Mass group categories

0

0+

I

Up to 22 lbs (10

Up to 29 lbs (13

20 — 40 lbs (9 —

kg)

kg)

18 kg)

Baby safety seat

Child safety

seat

IU

IU

IU

E

C, D, E

A, B, B1, C, D

IU

IU

IU

E

D, E

A, B, B1, D

IU Suitable for universal category ISOFIX child seats approved for use in this mass group.

*As defined by ECE-R16.

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX child seat, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for the intended seating locations.

Note: There are no ISOFIX Anchor Points on fourth row seats.

21

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Child Safety

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNING

You cannot open the rear doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on.

A child safety lock is on the rear edge of each rear door. You must set the child safety lock separately on each door.

Left-Hand Side

Turn it counterclockwise to switch the child lock on and clockwise to switch it off.

Right-Hand Side

Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock on and counterclockwise to switch it off.

22

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Safety Belts

FASTENING THE SAFETY

BELTS

WARNINGS

Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a distinct click. You have not fastened the safety belt correctly

if you do not hear a distinct click.

Make sure that your safety belt is securely stored away and is not outside your vehicle when closing the

door.

Pull the safety belt out steadily. It may lock if you pull it sharply or if your vehicle is on a slope.

Press the red button on the buckle to release the safety belt. Hold the tongue and let it retract completely and smoothly to its stowed position.

Using Safety Belts During

Pregnancy

WARNING

Position the safety belt correctly for your safety and that of your unborn child. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

23

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Safety Belts

Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt. The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder safety belt should be positioned low across the hips below the stomach and worn as tight as comfort will allow. The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT

ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure

to adjust the safety belt correctly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.

1.Support the safety belt loop while pressing the adjuster button.

2.Slide the adjuster to the desired position then release the button.

3.Pull down on the safety belt loop to make sure it is secure in position.

SAFETY BELT MINDER

WARNING

The system will only provide protection when you use the safety belt correctly.

The warning lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound when the following conditions have been met:

The driver’s safety belt has not been fastened.

Your vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed.

It will also illuminate when the driver’s safety belt is unfastened when your vehicle is moving.

If you do not fasten the driver’s safety belt both the audible and visual warnings will switch off automatically after approximately five minutes.

24

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Safety Belts

TurningtheSafetyBeltMinderOff

See an authorized dealer.

25

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front

of it!

Do not modify the front of your vehicle in any way. This could adversely affect deployment of the

airbags.

Wear a safety belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when

you use the safety belt properly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 79).

Repairs to the steering wheel, steering column, seats, airbags and safety belts must be carried out by

an authorized dealer.

Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers.

Do not puncture the seat with sharp objects. This could damage and adversely affect deployment of the

airbags.

Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by an authorized dealer.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.

Note: The front passenger airbag protects both positions of a double seat.

Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp cloth.

DRIVER AIRBAG

The airbag will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupant, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the airbag will not deploy.

PASSENGER AIRBAG

26

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

The airbag will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupant, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the airbag will not deploy.

Switching the Passenger Airbag

Off

WARNING

You must switch the airbag off when using a rearward facing child seat on the front seat.

The key switch and the airbag deactivation warning lamp are located in the instrument panel.

A Switch off

BSwitch on

Turn the switch to position A.

When you switch the ignition on, check that the airbag deactivation warning lamp illuminates.

Switching the Passenger Airbag

On

WARNING

You must switch the airbag on when you are not using a child seat on the front seat.

27

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

Turn the switch to position B.

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNING

Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by an authorized dealer.

The airbags are located inside the seatback of the front seats. There is a label attached to the side of the seatback to indicate this.

The airbag will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbag will not deploy in minor lateral and frontal collisions, rear collisions, or overturns.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS

Side curtain airbags are located over all side windows where there are driver and passenger seats. There are molded badges in the headlining above the side windows to indicate this.

The airbags will deploy during significant lateral collisions. They will also deploy during significant frontal angled collisions. The side curtain airbags will not deploy in minor lateral and frontal collisions, rear collisions or overturns.

28

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).

A decrease in operating range could be caused by:

weather conditions

nearby radio towers

structures around your vehicle

other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.

The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.

Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.

Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL

You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Remote Control (page 29).

To re-program the passive anti-theft system see an authorized dealer.

REMOTE CONTROL

You can program a maximum of eight remote controls to your vehicle. See an authorized dealer.

29

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Note: Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.

Note: Do not leave your keys in your vehicle.

Locking

Locking with the Key

Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle.

Locking with the Remote Control

Press the button.

Note: You can lock the driver door with the key. Use the key when the remote control is not functioning.

Double Locking(If Equipped)

WARNING

Do not use double locking when passengers or animals are inside your vehicle. You will not be able to

unlock the doors from the inside if you have double locked them.

Double locking is a theft protection feature that prevents someone from opening the doors from the inside.

Note: If you double lock your vehicle while inside, switch the ignition on to return the door locks to a single locked state.

Double Locking with the Key

Turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds.

Double Locking with the Remote Control

Press the button twice within three seconds.

Unlocking

Unlocking with the Key

Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle.

Unlocking with the Remote Control

Press the button.

Note: You can unlock the driver door with the key. Use the key when the remote control is not functioning.

Note: When you lock your vehicle for several weeks, the remote control will be switched off. Your vehicle must be unlocked and the engine started using the key. Unlocking and starting your vehicle once will enable the remote control.

Reprogramming the Unlocking

Function

You can reprogram the unlocking function so that only the driver door is unlocked. See Remote Control (page 29).

Locking and Unlocking

Confirmation

When you lock the doors, the direction indicators will flash twice.

When you unlock the doors, the direction indicators will flash once.

Note: If your vehicle has double locking, the direction indicators will flash only when your vehicle has been double locked.

30

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Locks

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Opening the Double Rear Doors

From Inside

A Lock

BUnlock

You can see the door lock status in the instrument panel. For item location: See At a Glance (page 10). The lamp will illuminate when you lock your vehicle.

Opening the Sliding Door

Slam Locking

Slam locking allows you to lock a door with the door open. The door will be locked when you close it.

Note: Do not leave your keys in your vehicle.

Note: The horn may sound if you try to lock the doors when a door is still open.

31

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Locks

Automatic Locking

Your vehicle has the capability for the doors to lock automatically when you exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). You can turn this function on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 57). If you have turned this function on, either use the interior door unlock button or switch the ignition off and use the key or remote control to unlock the rear or sliding door.

Note: When you have double locked your vehicle, the interior unlock button will only work for a period of 20 seconds.

Two-Stage Unlocking

Note: The direction indicators will flash once when you unlock the doors.

You will unlock the front doors when you:

Pull either interior handle (except if you have double locked the doors).

Automatic Re-Locking

The doors will re-lock automatically if you do not open a door within 45 seconds of unlocking the doors with the remote control. The door locks and the alarm will return to their previous state.

Automatic Unlocking

You can turn this function on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 57). When enabled, the automatic unlocking feature will unlock all doors within 10 minutes of the end of a drive cycle, when the driver door is opened and the ignition is off.

One-Stage Unlocking

You can turn this function on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 57).

When you use this feature, you will unlock all doors including the rear doors or liftgate and the sliding door.

Note: The direction indicators will flash once when you unlock the doors.

You will unlock all of the doors when you:

Pull either interior handle (except if you have double locked the doors).

Turn the key in the door lock.

Press the unlock button on the remote control once.

Press the interior unlock button once.

32

Turn the key in the door lock.

Press the unlock button on the remote control once.

Press the interior unlock button once.

Note: When you have double locked your vehicle, the interior unlock button will only work for a period of 20 seconds.

You will unlock the front doors and cargo area when you:

Turn the key in the door lock to the unlock position twice within three seconds.

Press the unlock button on the remote control twice within three seconds.

Press the interior unlock button twice within three seconds.

Note: When you have double locked your vehicle, the interior unlock button will only work for a period of 20 seconds.

Zone Re-Locking

If you enable zone re-locking and open one door, this will cause all other doors to remain locked. See an authorized dealer for further information.

The locks on Van, Bus and Kombi are split into two zones, cabin and cargo. For van and kombi vehicles, the cargo area comprises of the rear doors or liftgate and the sliding door. For Bus vehicles, the cargo area comprises of the rear doors or liftgate.

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Locks

Exit your vehicle and press the lock button.

Press the unlock button or the luggage compartment unlock button once to open the respective zone.

If you now open a door within the unlocked zone, the other doors in that zone will automatically lock.

Configurable Unlocking

Configurable unlocking is set at the time of vehicle purchase. It allows you to select which doors unlock when you press the unlock button or the luggage compartment unlock button on your remote control once or twice. You cannot turn this feature back on if you have had it turned off. See an authorized dealer for further information.

MANUAL LIFTGATE

WARNINGS

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of your vehicle. In a crash, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.

Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also

prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler, glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components.

Note: If you leave the liftgate open when driving the tailgate components could be damaged.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate

To Open the Liftgate

Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, then pull on the outside handle.

To Close the Liftgate

33

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Security

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT

SYSTEM

Principle of Operation

The system prevents someone from starting the engine with an incorrectly coded key.

Coded Keys

If you lose a key, you can obtain a replacement from an authorized dealer. If possible, provide them with the key number from the tag provided with the original keys. You can also obtain extra keys from an authorized dealer.

Note: Have all of your remaining keys erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have replacement keys coded together with recoding your remaining keys. See an authorized dealer for further information.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM

The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote control.

The park and direction indicators will flash and the horn will sound if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed.

Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle to arm the alarm.

Note: Do not shield your keys with metal objects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing a coded key.

Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine immobilizer will arm automatically after a short time.

Disarming the EngineImmobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine immobilizer will disarm automatically if a correctly coded key is used.

If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

34

Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by:

Unlocking the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control.

Switching the ignition on or starting the engine.

Using a key in the driver’s door to unlock your vehicle, then switching the ignition on within 12 seconds.

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 79).

1.Unlock the steering column.

2.Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL

Select the required source on the audio unit.

You can operate the following functions with the control:

Type 1

Use the arrows on the steering wheel to navigate through the menus. Press OK to make a selection.

35

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Steering Wheel

AVolume up

B Seek up or next

CVolume down

DSeek down or previous

Seek, Next or Previous

Pull the control to select or deselect voice control. See SYNC™ (page 218).

CRUISE CONTROL

Press the seek button to:

tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset

play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:

tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band

seek through a track.

See Cruise Control (page 116).

36

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Steering Wheel

INFORMATION DISPLAY

CONTROL

See Information Displays (page 57).

37

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Intermittent Wipe

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers and ignition off before using an automatic car wash.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.

A Short wipe interval

B Intermittent wipe

CLong wipe interval

Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers(If Equipped)

When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases.

ASingle wipe

B Intermittent wipe

CNormal wipe

DHigh speed wipe

AUTOWIPERS

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers and ignition off before using an automatic car wash.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.

Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate.

38

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

Note: During wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur.

In these conditions, you can do the following:

Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield.

Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.

Switch autowipers off.

AHigh sensitivity

BOn

CLow sensitivity

Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat.

Note: Do not operate the washers for more than 10 seconds at a time.

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever, wiping will continue for a short period of time.

Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in the area around the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount of moisture on the windshield and automatically turns the wipers on. It will adjust the wiper speed by the amount of moisture that the sensor detects on the windshield.

Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield.

39

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS

Rear Window Wiper

Note: Make sure you switch the rear window wiper and ignition off before using an automatic car wash.

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

A Intermittent wipe

B Low speed wipe

COff

Press the top of the button to switch intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the button again to switch low speed wipe on. Press the bottom of the button to switch the rear window wiper off.

When you switch on the front wipers and move the gearshift lever to reverse (R), rear intermittent wipe will automatically turn on.

Rear Window Washer

Push the lever away from you to operate the rear window washer. The washer will operate for as long as you push the lever away from you. When you release the lever, wiping will continue for a short period of time.

40

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

CondensationinLampAssemblies

Lighting Control Positions

Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets).

A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.

Examples of unacceptable condensation are:

A water puddle inside the lamp.

Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens.

If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

41

AOff

BParking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps

CHeadlamps

Parking Lamps

Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps will cause the battery to run out of charge.

Switch the ignition off.

Both Sides

Set the lighting control to position B.

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

One Side

Headlamp Flasher

Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps.

A Right-hand side

BLeft-hand side

High Beams

Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on.

Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off.

42

AUTOLAMPS

The headlamps will switch on and off automatically in low light situations or during inclement weather.

The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps will remain on. See

Information Displays (page 57).

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

When the headlamp switch is in the Autolamps position, the windshield wiper activated exterior lamps will turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on. The exterior lamps will turn off after a short period of time when you switch the windshield wipers off.

This feature does not turn on the exterior lamps:

During a single wipe.

While the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition.

If the wipers are in automatic or intermittent modes.

Note: If you have autolamps and autowipers switched on the low beam headlamps will turn on automatically when the windshield wipers operate continuously.

Press it repeatedly or press it and hold it until the desired level is reached.

Note: If you disconnect the battery or it loses charge the instrument lighting will return to its brightest setting.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on.

Note: You may have to manually switch the headlamps on in severe weather conditions.

Note: If you have autolamps switched on you can only switch the high beam headlamps on once the system has turned the headlamps on.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

Daytime Running Lamps(If Equipped)

WARNING

Always remember to switch the headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather. The

system does not turn the rear lamps on and may not provide adequate lighting. Failure to switch the headlamps on under these conditions may result in a crash.

When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on.

To switch the system on:

1.Switch the ignition on.

2.Turn the lighting control switch to the off or autolamp position.

43

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the high beam on or off.

A manual override may be required when approaching other road users such as cyclists.

Do not use the system in fog.

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. A manual override may be

necessary in these cases.

The system may not deactivate the high beam if the lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden by obstacles (for

example guard rails).

Check and replace wiper blades regularly to ensure the camera sensor has a clear view through the

windscreen. Replacement wiper blades must be the correct length.

The system will automatically switch on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off high beam before it can distract other road users. Low beam will remain on.

A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle. This monitors conditions continuously to decide when to switch the high beams on and off.

Once the system is active the high beam will switch on if:

It is dark enough to require the use of high beams and

there is no traffic or street lighting ahead and

vehicle speed is greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The high beam will switch off if:

The ambient light is high enough that high beam is not required.

An approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps are detected.

Street lighting is detected.

Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (25 km/h).

Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

Note: Reflective road signs may be detected as oncoming traffic and the headlamps will be switched to low beam.

Note: Always fit Ford Original Parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance.

44

The camera sensor is too hot or becomes blocked.

Activating the System

Switch the system on using the information display and autolamps. See Information Displays (page 57). See Autolamps

(page 42).

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

Manually Overriding the System

Turn the switch to the autolamps position. The Automatic High Beam Control indicator will illuminate to confirm when your system is ready to assist.

Note: The indicator will only illuminate when it is dark and headlamps have been switched on.

Note: The system may take a short time to initialize after first switching the ignition on, especially in very dark conditions. The high beam will not automatically switch on during this time.

Setting the System Sensitivity

Push or pull the lever to switch between high and low beam.

Note: This is a temporary override and the system will return to automatic operation after a short period.

To permanently deactivate the system use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

The system has three sensitivity levels which can be accessed via the information display. See InformationDisplays (page 57).

The set level determines the speed at which the high beam will be restored after detected traffic leaves the field of view.

Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.

You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except off.

45

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

Note: Only use fog lamps during reduced visibility, for example, fog, snow or heavy rain.

Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on.

REAR FOG LAMPS

Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.

You can only switch the rear fog lamps on when either the front fog lamps or low beam headlamps are on.

Note: Only use the rear fog lamps when visibility is less than 164 feet (50 meters).

Note: Do not use the rear fog lamps when it is raining or snowing.

Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on.

HEADLAMP LEVELING

Adjust the level of the headlamp beams according to your vehicle load.

Set the headlamp leveling control to zero when your vehicle is unloaded. Set the headlamp beams to give between 115 feet and 330 feet (35 meters and 100 meters) of road surface illumination when your vehicle is partially or fully loaded.

To adjust the level of the headlamp beams:

1.Press to release the control.

2.Rotate the control to the required setting.

3.Press to close the control.

46

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

CORNERING LAMPS

AHeadlamp beam

BCornering lamp beam

The cornering lamps illuminate the inside of a corner when you are turning.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change.

47

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Lighting

INTERIOR LAMPS

Courtesy Lamp

AOff

B Door contact

COn

Reading Lamps

If you switch the ignition off, the reading lamps will switch off automatically after a short period of time to prevent your vehicle battery from losing charge. To switch them back on, switch the ignition on for a short period of time.

Entrance Lamps

If you set the switch to position B, the courtesy lamp will switch on when you unlock your vehicle, open a door or the liftgate. If you leave a door open with the ignition switched off, the courtesy lamp will switch off automatically after a short period of time to prevent your vehicle battery from losing charge. To switch it back on, switch the ignition on for a short period of time.

The courtesy lamp will also switch on when you switch the ignition off. It will switch off automatically after a short period of time or when you start the engine.

If you set the switch to position C with the ignition switched off, the courtesy lamp will switch on. It will switch off automatically after a short period of time to prevent your vehicle battery from losing charge. To switch it back on, switch the ignition on for a short period of time.

The lamps are located above the rear doors and sliding door. They will switch on and off automatically when you open and close the doors. If you unlock the doors with the remote control, they will switch on. They will switch off automatically after a short period of time.

48

Tourneo Custom/Transit Custom (TTF) Vehicles Built From: 19-06-2014, Vehicles Built Up To: 31-12-2014, EK2J-19A321-AKA (CG3577en) enGBR, Edition date: 05/2014, First Printing

Loading…

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Антиген сапной цветной для пластинчатой реакции агглютинации инструкция
  • Скачать ховер руководство по ремонту скачать бесплатно
  • Гентамицин уколы для кошек дозировка инструкция по применению
  • Руководство по эксплуатации газ 322133
  • Тонзилгон н драже инструкция по применению отзывы взрослым